1



          1        MANITOBA CLEAN ENVIRONMENT COMMISSION

          2                

          3                          VERBATIM TRANSCRIPT

          4                              Volume 1 

          5                                   

          6                    Including List of Participants

          7                                   

          8              

          9                                   

         10                            Hearing

         11                               

         12         Wuskwatim Generation and Transmission Project

         13                               

         14                          Presiding:

         15                     Gerard Lecuyer, Chair

         16                          Kathi Kinew

         17                        Harvey Nepinak

         18                         Robert Mayer

         19                        Terry Sargeant

         20           

         21                   Monday, March 1, 2004

         22                        Radisson Hotel

         23                      288 Portage Avenue

         24                      Winnipeg, Manitoba

         25                             




                                                                        2



          1                  LIST OF PARTICIPANTS

          2   

          3   Clean Environment Commission:

          4   Gerard Lecuyer        Chairman

          5   Terry Sargeant        Member

          6   Harvey Nepinak        Member

          7   Kathi Avery Kinew     Member

          8   Doug Abra             Counsel to Commission

          9   Rory Grewar           Staff

         10   CEC Advisors:

         11   Mel Falk

         12   Dave Farlinger

         13   Jack Scriven

         14   Jim Sandison

         15   Jean McClellan

         16   Brent McLean

         17   Kyla Gibson

         18   

         19   Nisichawayasihk Cree Nation:

         20   Chief Jerry Primrose

         21   

         22   

         23   

         24   

         25   




                                                                        3



          1                        LIST OF PARTICIPANTS

          2                

          3   Manitoba Conservation:

          4   Larry Strachan

          5   

          6   Consumers Association of Canada/Manitoba Society of Seniors:

          7   Byron Williams

          8   

          9   Manitoba Hydro:

         10   Ed Wojczynski

         11   Ken Adams

         12   Elvis Thomas

         13   Carolyn Wray

         14   Ron Mazur

         15   LLoyd Kyczek

         16   Cam Osler

         17   Stuart Davies

         18   David Hicks

         19   George Rempel

         20   Campbell MacInnes

         21   David Cormie

         22   

         23   

         24   

         25   




                                                                        4



          1                   INDEX OF EXHIBITS

          2   

          3   Number                                              Page

          4   CEC-1000 -  Correspondence dated April 

          5               25th, 2003 to the Chairman of the 

          6               Environment Commission from the 

          7               Minister of Conservation   

          8               Steve Ashton                            14

          9   

         10    MC-1000:   Mr. Strachan's overhead    

         11               transparencies from Manitoba            26

         12               Conservation

         13   

         14   

         15   MH/NCN-1000: Presentation transparencies            51

         16   

         17   

         18   

         19   

         20   

         21   

         22   

         23   

         24   

         25   




                                                                        5



          1   MONDAY, MARCH 1, 2004 

          2   Upon commencing at 9:11 a.m. 

          3   

          4          THE CHAIRMAN:  Good morning, ladies and 

          5   gentlemen, and welcome.  Just before calling the 

          6   public hearing on the Wuskwatim Generation and 

          7   Transmission Projects to order, I wish to begin by 

          8   thanking all of the participants for their 

          9   involvement and the efforts they have put in this 

         10   process leading up to this event.  

         11          The interrogatory process alone has resulted 

         12   in a significant amount of information being made 

         13   available to the participants, to the panel and the 

         14   public which would not likely have been possible 

         15   during the public hearing alone.  

         16          My name is Gerard Lecuyer.  I am a member of 

         17   the Manitoba Clean Environment Commission and the 

         18   panel chairperson of this Commission, Wuskwatim 

         19   Generation and Transmission Projects review.  With me 

         20   today are four other commissioners serving on this 

         21   panel.  Ms. Kathi Avery Kinew, Mr. Robert Mayer to my 

         22   right, Mr. Terry Sargeant, Mr. Harvey Nepinak.  And 

         23   of course you have heard that Mr. Terry Sargeant here 

         24   has been appointed recently as Chairperson of the 

         25   Manitoba Clean Environment Commission. 




                                                                        6



          1          In addition to the panel, I would like to 

          2   introduce staff and advisors that are assisting us 

          3   with this review including the Commission Secretary, 

          4   Mr. Rory Grewar, sitting at the table to my left, the 

          5   Commission Administrative Secretary, Ms. Joyce 

          6   Mueller who we don't see.  She's at the registration 

          7   table near the entrance.  Commission counsel, Mr. 

          8   Doug Abra sitting right here of the firm Hill, Abra, 

          9   Dewar.  And from our technical advisory team, Ms. 

         10   Jean McLellan, Ms. Kyla Gibson of Price Waterhouse as 

         11   well as Mr. Brent McLean.  They are all sitting at 

         12   the table over there.  Mr. Dave Farlinger and Mr. Jim 

         13   Sanderson of Energy Consultants International sitting 

         14   in the back.  Dr. Robert Hecky with the University of 

         15   Waterloo and Mr. Mel Falk of Environmental 

         16   International sitting here. 

         17          Before continuing, I would like to explain 

         18   that the Manitoba Clean Environment Commission is an 

         19   arm's length provincial agency that encourages and 

         20   facilitates public involvement in environmental 

         21   matters and offers advice and recommendations to the 

         22   government.  

         23          The Commission exercises its mandate through 

         24   public hearings, investigations, mediation and 

         25   education.  Please see our website at 




                                                                        7



          1   www.manitobacec.ca for information about the 

          2   Commission and this public hearing.  

          3          The Commission operates under the authority of 

          4   the Manitoba Environment Act.  It is also directed by 

          5   procedural guidelines to ensure that the hearings 

          6   remain fair and open forums for the exchange of 

          7   information and ideas and that they provide full 

          8   opportunity for public involvement and the 

          9   environmental assessment process in Manitoba. 

         10          We are here today at the request of the 

         11   Minister of Conservation to conduct an integrated 

         12   public hearing respecting the Manitoba Hydro and 

         13   Nisichawayasihk Cree Nation proposal for the 

         14   development of the Wuskwatim generation station and 

         15   associated transmission lines. 

         16          These two words have been in the air for quite 

         17   some time.  Even I can now say them.  I sure couldn't 

         18   a few months back. 

         19          The Commission was mandated to conduct the 

         20   hearing to consider firstly the justification, need 

         21   for and alternatives to the Wuskwatim proposals.  And 

         22   secondly, the potential environmental socioeconomic 

         23   and cultural effects of the construction and 

         24   operation of the Wuskwatim proposals.  

         25          The Commission has requested to conduct the 




                                                                        8



          1   hearing in general accordance with the process 

          2   guidelines respecting public hearings which include 

          3   procedures for prehearing meetings or conferences and 

          4   proprietary information. 

          5          Following the public hearing, the Commission 

          6   shall provide the report to the Minister of 

          7   Conservation pursuant to section 7 subsection 3 of 

          8   the Environment Act.  

          9          Before continuing, I would like to call on Mr. 

         10   Rory Grewar to read for the record the scope of the 

         11   Commission's review of the Wuskwatim projects into 

         12   the public record.

         13          MR. GREWAR:  Thank you, Mr. Chairman.  

         14   Correspondence dated April 25th, 2003 to the Chairman 

         15   of the Environment Commission from the Minister of 

         16   Conservation, Steve Ashton.  I'll read the 

         17   correspondence.

         18                         "The Environmental Approvals 

         19                  Branch of my department is in the 

         20                  final review stage of the Environment 

         21                  Act Proposals from Manitoba Hydro for 

         22                  the proposed Wuskwatim Generating 

         23                  Station and associated transmission 

         24                  facilities (Wuskwatim proposals).  

         25                         A copy of the Terms of 




                                                                        9



          1                  Reference for the public hearing is 

          2                  enclosed.  If possible, the report on 

          3                  the hearing should be submitted to me 

          4                  on or before December 1, 2003.  

          5                         Mr. Larry Strachan, Director of 

          6                  Environmental Approvals Branch will 

          7                  coordinate department participation in 

          8                  the hearing."  

          9          The background and terms are as follows:  

         10   Mandate of the hearings.  

         11                         "The Commission shall conduct 

         12                  an integrated public hearing, in 

         13                  appropriate locations in Winnipeg and 

         14                  Northern Manitoba as determined by the 

         15                  Commission, to consider: 

         16                         - Firstly, the justification, 

         17                  need for and alternatives to the 

         18                  Wuskwatim Proposals; and               

         19                         - Secondly, the potential 

         20                  environmental, socio-economic and 

         21                  cultural effects, of the construction 

         22                  and operation of the Wuskwatim 

         23                  Proposals.  

         24                         The Commission shall conduct 

         25                  the hearing in general accordance with 




                                                                       10



          1                  its Process Guidelines Respecting 

          2                  Public Hearings which include 

          3                  procedures for Pre-Hearing Meetings or 

          4                  Conferences and Proprietary 

          5                  Information.  

          6                         Following the public hearing 

          7                  the Commission shall provide a report 

          8                  to the Minister of Conservation 

          9                  pursuant to section 7(3) of The 

         10                  Environment Act.  

         11                         The Commission may, at any 

         12                  time, request that the Minister of 

         13                  Conservation review or clarify these 

         14                  Terms of Reference."  

         15          I'll read into the record, Mr. Chairman, the 

         16   scope of the review.  

         17   

         18                         "For the justification, need 

         19                  for and alternatives to the Wuskwatim 

         20                  Proposals component of the hearing, 

         21                  the Commission shall: 

         22                         - Consider whether all 

         23                  alternative resource options have been 

         24                  considered and whether the Wuskwatim 

         25                  Proposals have been selected on 




                                                                       11



          1                  reasonable grounds, including economic 

          2                  viability as an export market driven 

          3                  project and relevant technical 

          4                  factors.  The review of economic 

          5                  viability shall consider the Wuskwatim 

          6                  Proposals in their entirety.  

          7                         - Include the effect, if any, 

          8                  of the Wuskwatim Proposals on Manitoba 

          9                  Hydro customer rates and the 

         10                  Corporation's financial stability.  

         11                  The partnership between the 

         12                  Nisichawayasihk Cree Nation and 

         13                  Manitoba Hydro and the associated 

         14                  arrangements for such partnership are 

         15                  to be described to the degree such 

         16                  information is required to understand 

         17                  the financial analysis.  

         18                         - Give consideration, at a 

         19                  conceptual level, to the 

         20                  environmental, socio-economic and 

         21                  cultural effects of the Wuskwatim 

         22                  proposals relative to available 

         23                  alternative resources.  

         24                         - Consider Manitoba Hydro's 

         25                  electricity generation capability, 




                                                                       12



          1                  market prospects and risks as they 

          2                  pertain to the Wuskwatim proposals 

          3                  including:

          4                         - load growth in export 

          5                  jurisdictions;                

          6                         - energy supply situation in 

          7                  the export jurisdictions; and 

          8                         - energy pricing trends and 

          9                  industry restructuring.  

         10                  For the potential environmental, 

         11                  socio-economic, and cultural effects 

         12                  of the Wuskwatim Proposals component 

         13                  of the hearing, the Commission shall 

         14                  consider the Environmental Impact 

         15                  Statement, and public concerns, and 

         16                  with consideration of the evidence 

         17                  received on the justification, need 

         18                  for, and alternatives for the 

         19                  Wuskwatim Proposals, provide a 

         20                  recommendation on:            

         21                         - Whether Environment Act 

         22                  Licences should be issued to Manitoba 

         23                  Hydro for the Wuskwatim Proposals. 

         24                  Should the Commission recommend the 

         25                  issuance of Environment Act Licences 




                                                                       13



          1                  for the Wuskwatim Proposals, then 

          2                  appropriate recommendations should be 

          3                  provided respecting: 

          4                         - Measures proposed to mitigate 

          5                  any adverse environmental, 

          6                  socio-economic, and cultural effects 

          7                  resulting from the Wuskwatim proposals 

          8                  and where appropriate, to manage any 

          9                  residual adverse effects;  and

         10                         - Future monitoring and 

         11                  research that may be recommended in 

         12                  relation to the Wuskwatim Proposals. 

         13                  The Clean Environment Commission's 

         14                  recommendations shall incorporate, 

         15                  consider and directly reflect, where 

         16                  appropriate, the Principles of 

         17                  Sustainable Development and Guidelines 

         18                  for Sustainable Development as 

         19                  contained in Sustainable Development 

         20                  Strategy for Manitoba."  

         21          That's the direction from the Minister and the 

         22   scope of the hearings as contained in the terms of 

         23   reference for the Clean Environment Commission public 

         24   hearings on Manitoba Hydro Wuskwatim Proposals, Mr. 

         25   Chairman.  And with your leave, I'd like to enter 




                                                                       14



          1   those as an exhibit.  

          2          A word of explanation in terms of the exhibit 

          3   procedure.  The Commission will issue the prehearing 

          4   Exhibit list later this week and that will include 

          5   all of the exhibits that were filed as part of the 

          6   prehearing process.  For the purposes of the 

          7   proceedings today and forward, we would like to begin 

          8   with numbered series 1000 and beyond.  And so this, 

          9   as the first exhibit, will be CEC-1000.  And it's the 

         10   correspondence as dated and read and terms of 

         11   reference as attached.  

         12   

         13          (EXHIBIT CEC-1000 - Correspondence dated April 

         14          25th, 2003 to the Chairman of the Environment  

         15          Commission from the Minister of Conservation   

         16          Steve Ashton) 

         17   

         18          THE CHAIRMAN:  Thank you, Mr. Grewar.  The 

         19   Commission is convening the hearing in Winnipeg over 

         20   a three week period between March 1st and 17th.  We 

         21   will then travel up north to continue the hearing in 

         22   Thompson on March 22nd and 23rd and in The Pas on 

         23   March 25th and 26th.  The hearing will then reconvene 

         24   in Winnipeg on April 6th for closing statements.  And 

         25   it is our expectation that the proceedings will wrap 




                                                                       15



          1   up on April 7th. 

          2          We will begin today with opening remarks by 

          3   Mr. Larry Strachan of Manitoba Conservation on the 

          4   environmental assessment and review process 

          5   undertaken to date and the licensing process to 

          6   follow the public hearing.  There will be no 

          7   cross-examination of Mr. Strachan at this time.  This 

          8   will occur later on in the process, I believe on the 

          9   15th when the public administration team makes its 

         10   overview presentation. 

         11          The co-proponents Manitoba Hydro and 

         12   Nisichawayasihk will then give a presentation on 

         13   their need for and alternatives for the Wuskwatim 

         14   Generation and Transmission Projects and the 

         15   environmental impact statements to the project.  This 

         16   will be followed by cross-examination or questioning 

         17   of the co-proponents by the Commission and/or its 

         18   counsel, then by the registered participants 

         19   according to alphabetical order and by any member of 

         20   the public in attendance.  This process might well 

         21   take a number of days.  

         22          After the full cross-examination of the 

         23   co-proponents has concluded, the project 

         24   administration team consisting of members of the 

         25   Province and the Federal Governments will then make a 




                                                                       16



          1   presentation on the results of the cooperative 

          2   environmental assessment process and then will be 

          3   available for cross-examination.  

          4          We will then proceed to hear the presentations 

          5   prepared by the various registered participants who 

          6   will present in alphabetical order unless prior 

          7   arrangements have been made with the Commission 

          8   secretary to do otherwise. 

          9          Throughout the proceedings, the co-proponents 

         10   and their counsel will lead cross-examination or 

         11   questioning followed by the Commission and/or its 

         12   counsel and then in alphabetical order, by each 

         13   registered participant and/or their counsel.  

         14   Following this, an opportunity will be provided for 

         15   any member of the public in attendance to ask 

         16   questions of the presenter.  All presenters at the 

         17   end of their cross-examination will have an 

         18   opportunity to re-examine their witnesses.  

         19          And just before I make my final comments, I 

         20   would like to go back to Mr. Grewar.  I believe 

         21   you've already presented your items on the public 

         22   record?

         23          MR. GREWAR:  Yes, Mr. Chairman.  It was just a 

         24   clarification on the exhibit process.

         25          THE CHAIRMAN:  Thank you.  So just a few more 




                                                                       17



          1   words to do with the housekeeping issues.  Firstly, 

          2   in regards to registration.  Please ensure that you 

          3   register and indicate if you will be giving a 

          4   presentation.  All registrants will be provided with 

          5   a copy of the report of this public hearing.  

          6   Secondly, please provide 30 copies of your 

          7   presentation to Mr. Grewar.  The copies are needed by 

          8   the panel members, technical staff and for the public 

          9   record.  Submissions will also be shared with the 

         10   participants.  And if you have not the required 

         11   copies, the Commission staff can assist you with the 

         12   preparation of copies.  All you have to do is see Ms. 

         13   Mueller at the registration desk to help you with the 

         14   preparation of the required copies.  Ms. Joyce 

         15   Mueller has a schedule of the proceedings with the 

         16   names of the presenters and will provide copies to 

         17   the media and to others who may require it.           

         18          Fourthly, please use the microphones, identify 

         19   yourselves clearly for the record when you give 

         20   presentations or ask questions.  If you don't, I will 

         21   simply have to interrupt you and ask you to do so.  

         22          Verbatim transcripts of each day of the 

         23   proceedings will be posted on the Internet the 

         24   morning following each session.  The website is 

         25   www.reidreporting.com.  And that is Reid spelled 




                                                                       18



          1   R-E-I-D.  I repeat www.reidreporting.com.  You can 

          2   also make arrangements with the transcription service 

          3   to purchase copies of the transcripts in various 

          4   formats.  Reid Reporting Services can be contacted by 

          5   calling 947-9774 here in Winnipeg, 947-9774.  

          6          And finally, at the conclusion of the 

          7   hearings, the Commission will make a report, will 

          8   prepare a report containing advice and 

          9   recommendations for the Minister of Conservation.  

         10   The Environment Act allows 90 days following the 

         11   closure of the hearing for this report to be 

         12   submitted.  Following submission of the report, the 

         13   Minister will determine the date upon which the 

         14   report will be released to the public.  

         15          And lastly, just before we begin these 

         16   deliberations, I want to call upon the Great Manitou, 

         17   God, the Divine Master, whatever you call Him, to 

         18   look favourably upon this meeting to help us think 

         19   clearly, to help us speak the truth, to guide us into 

         20   use of proper decorum and respect of our fellow 

         21   participants and to help us come forward with the 

         22   decisions that are in the best interests of 

         23   Manitobans for today and for future generations.  And 

         24   I would like to call upon Elder Sam Dysart to come 

         25   and speak, to bring blessings upon this gathering.    




                                                                       19



          1          ELDER DYSART:  Thank you.  Please stand.  

          2   First thing I would like to say, it's an honour for 

          3   me as an Elder from Nelson House.  My name is Sam 

          4   Dysart.  I had been standing here for the last 30 

          5   years.  I was first on the Northern Flood Agreement, 

          6   now on the Future Development Agreement.  And I had a 

          7   lot of fights and I had a lot of good times with 

          8   people and I had a lot of griefs.  But I hope that 

          9   this will come in better for my children, 

         10   grandchildren and great-grandchildren and I pray that 

         11   we have a very good meeting today for it's a nice day 

         12   outside.  Let's be happy, let's be honest with each 

         13   other and let us tell the truth for the truth is the 

         14   only thing that is survival in our community and in 

         15   life.  Let us pray in our language and let us ask God 

         16   to help us in Manitoba, in the whole world.  

         17   

         18          (PRAYER) 

         19   

         20          ELDER DYSART:  Thank you.  

         21          THE CHAIRMAN:  I now call upon Mr. Strachan, 

         22   Larry Strachan of the Environmental Approvals, 

         23   Manitoba Conservation to come and present an 

         24   assessment process overview.  Mr. Grewar.

         25          MR. GREWAR:  Could you please state your name 




                                                                       20



          1   for the record.

          2          MR. STRACHAN:  Larry Strachan.

          3          MR. GREWAR:  Mr. Strachan, are you aware that 

          4   it is an offence in Manitoba to knowingly mislead 

          5   this Commission?

          6          MR. STRACHAN:  Yes, I am.

          7          MR. GREWAR:  Do you promise to tell only the 

          8   truth during proceedings before this Commission?

          9          MR. STRACHAN:  Yes, I do.

         10          MR. GREWAR:  Thank you, sir.  

         11          MR. STRACHAN:  Good morning, Mr. Chairman, 

         12   commissioners, participants, ladies and gentlemen.  

         13   As Rory just indicated, my name is Larry Strachan.  

         14   I'm employed as the Director of the Environmental 

         15   Approvals Branch for Manitoba Conservation.  And 

         16   through that process, it's my responsibility to 

         17   administer the environmental assessment and licensing 

         18   process under the Environment Act.  

         19          For this particular public hearing and review 

         20   for the Manitoba Hydro NCN proposals, I also, as 

         21   Chair of the project administration team, to 

         22   administer the cooperative process.  I am going to 

         23   talk and give you a brief overview of the cooperative 

         24   environmental assessment process that Manitoba and 

         25   Canada carried out on the proposals under review. 




                                                                       21



          1          As you know, there are two projects under 

          2   review.  There's a generation station and associated 

          3   transmission lines.  Under the Environment Act, they 

          4   are two separate development proposals and so we 

          5   sought two separate development applications from the 

          6   proponents.  We agreed to review the two proposals 

          7   concurrently under the Environment Act and we also 

          8   developed information in that regard.  

          9          Manitoba Environment licences are required for 

         10   both proposals.  And under the federal legislation, 

         11   there is what is known as a comprehensive study 

         12   report and review required for some aspects of the 

         13   generation station and some of the stream crossings 

         14   of the access road to the generation station.         

         15          Because both Manitoba and Canada had approving 

         16   authorities, we agreed, pursuant to a cooperative 

         17   agreements we have with Canada, to enter into a 

         18   cooperative environmental assessment process for the 

         19   two proposals.  I must stress it's a cooperative 

         20   process because it's only cooperation between the two 

         21   levels of government.  At the end of the day, there 

         22   are separate and independent decisions required by 

         23   both Manitoba and Canada for the proposals. 

         24          To administer and guide the proponents through 

         25   the process, we developed and formed what is known as 




                                                                       22



          1   a project administration team under the agreement.  

          2   The team consists of representatives of both Manitoba 

          3   and Canada.  And as I indicated, I chaired the team.  

          4   One of my staff, Mr. Trent Hreno participated, Mr. 

          5   Dan McNaughton from the Canadian Environmental 

          6   Assessment Agency was on the team and Ms. Beverly 

          7   Ross from Fisheries and Oceans Canada was also on the 

          8   team.  

          9          Ms. Ross is the federal responsible authority 

         10   for the generation project and she must take 

         11   decisions under the federal legislation for the 

         12   generation station.  

         13          To generate the information required in the 

         14   cooperative process, we agreed to use the Manitoba 

         15   Environment Act provisions, Section 11 and Section 

         16   12.  To further guide the proponents, we developed 

         17   two sets of draft environmental assessment 

         18   guidelines; one for the generation station, one for 

         19   the transmission line project. 

         20          We then asked the Clean Environment 

         21   Commission, your body, Mr. Chairman, to hold meetings 

         22   on the draft guidelines and provide some advice to 

         23   the department and the Minister following the 

         24   meetings.  This was done and then we finalized the 

         25   guidelines and that formed the guidance documents for 




                                                                       23



          1   the proponents to prepare the information on the two 

          2   proposals and the environmental assessment 

          3   documentation.  

          4          We also subjected the guidelines, not only at 

          5   the public review but to technical government review 

          6   where he sought information from both levels of 

          7   government to insert information from their 

          8   perspective into the guidelines.  

          9          The process formally started with the filing 

         10   of proposals in December of 2001.  As I indicated, we 

         11   developed the environmental assessment guidelines and 

         12   they were actually finalized in April of 2002.  It 

         13   took about a year for the proponents to prepare the 

         14   environmental assessment documentation and that 

         15   documentation on both the needs and alternatives for 

         16   the generation station and the environmental 

         17   assessment documentation was filed with the 

         18   department in April of 2003.  

         19          Under the Environment Act, we seek advice by 

         20   distributing material to both the public venue and to 

         21   a technical advisory committee venue.  Normally, the 

         22   public venue is administered by the department 

         23   without a public hearing but because we are now 

         24   before a public hearing for these proposals, we are 

         25   relying very strongly on the Commission process for 




                                                                       24



          1   the public input on the proposals.  However, the 

          2   technical review was conducted through what is known 

          3   as a technical advisory committee.  It's a committee 

          4   composed of a number of federal and provincial 

          5   government representatives and they review the 

          6   information provided to them and provide advice back 

          7   to myself and the Minister on the information under 

          8   review based on their area of expertise, their 

          9   experience and other information they have available 

         10   to them.  

         11          As a result of the public and technical review 

         12   of the documentation, we required two supplemental 

         13   filings from the proponents to further clarify and 

         14   get more information on issues that were under review 

         15   and identified by mainly our technical reviewers.  I 

         16   must say the public input to our process was quite 

         17   minimal and I expect that is because of the Clean 

         18   Environment Commission process and people were 

         19   waiting to participate in your process, Mr. Chairman, 

         20   to provide that public input to the information under 

         21   review. 

         22          One of the challenges of environmental 

         23   assessment in Canada is that there are requirements 

         24   of both the provinces in Canada for environmental 

         25   assessment matters and the legislation, although 




                                                                       25



          1   complimentary in some areas, is quite different in 

          2   other areas.  And one of the areas that is quite 

          3   different is the specific requirements that Fisheries 

          4   and Oceans require to carry out their 

          5   responsibilities under both the Federal Environmental 

          6   Assessment Legislation and the Federal Fisheries Act. 

          7   And as a result, they require a lot more real 

          8   specific information than the province generally does 

          9   in these matters.  And so they generally go forward 

         10   independently and seek and work out that specific 

         11   information with the proponents.  

         12          And they are doing that in this case.  They 

         13   have requested a number of specific information 

         14   documents and the proponents have provided that to 

         15   Fisheries and Oceans Canada and that documentation is 

         16   currently under review.  And it will be considered, 

         17   at the end of the day, in the federal decision-making 

         18   process. 

         19          As a result of our technical review of the 

         20   information, we determined in October of 2003 that in 

         21   respect of the initial documentation filed and the 

         22   supplementary filed information filed as a result of 

         23   our request for further information, we were 

         24   satisfied that the documentation at that stage 

         25   addressed the intent and scope of the two sets of 




                                                                       26



          1   guidelines that we provided for the generation 

          2   station and the transmission line. 

          3          We recognize that there will be further 

          4   information generated through the public hearing 

          5   process and we also recognize that, as I just 

          6   indicated, that the Fisheries and Oceans information 

          7   would be forthcoming as the process unwound. 

          8          We, therefore, made a determination at that 

          9   point in time that the documentation would be 

         10   sufficient for you to consider through this public 

         11   hearing process, Mr. Chairman, and that is the stage 

         12   of the process that we are now in. 

         13          I just want to conclude by indicating that as 

         14   part of our process and in fact as part of the 

         15   federal process, the public information and advice 

         16   from this public hearing is a very important 

         17   component to our final decision making.  We are 

         18   looking for a full and complete public hearing 

         19   process and we will very strongly consider your 

         20   advice and recommendations following the conclusion 

         21   of your deliberations.  Thank you, Mr. Chairman.

         22          THE CHAIRMAN:  Thank you.  

         23          MR. GREWAR:  Mr. Chairman, if we might enter 

         24   Mr. Strachan's overhead transparencies as Exhibit 

         25   MC-1000 from Manitoba Conservation.




                                                                       27



          1          THE CHAIRMAN:  Thank you, Mr. Grewar.  

          2   

          3          (EXHIBIT #MC-1000:  Mr. Strachan's overhead    

          4          transparencies from Manitoba Conservation)

          5   

          6          THE CHAIRMAN:  I realize there's a number of 

          7   people standing in the back and hopefully we'll find 

          8   a way of providing relief in terms of chairs somehow 

          9   during this process.  And I don't know that we can 

         10   address that this morning but we'll make an attempt 

         11   to do that for the ongoing process this afternoon. 

         12          We will take a break sometime around 10:30  

         13   but we are a long ways from there.  At this point, I 

         14   call upon the proponents to get started with their 

         15   presentation of their proposal.

         16          MR. PRIMROSE:  Good morning, everybody.  Good 

         17   morning, Mr. Chairman.  My name is Jerry Primrose.  

         18   I'm Chief of the Nisichawayasihk Cree Nation.  I 

         19   would like to thank you and the Commissioners and the 

         20   other participants to hear the opportunity to make 

         21   our presentation on the Wuskwatim Generation and 

         22   Transmission Project.  I would also like to 

         23   acknowledge the other interested people from the 

         24   public and various groups attending this hearing.     

         25          Today we are here with Manitoba Hydro, my 




                                                                       28



          1   colleague, Ken Adams.  I speak with pride today for 

          2   the people of Nisichawayasihk Cree Nation, the 

          3   descendants of our Cree ancestors who have lived in 

          4   Northern Manitoba for 7,500 years.  I would like to 

          5   give you some background about our people.  

          6          Until the 20th century, our people had a 

          7   thriving lifestyle supported by fishers, hunters and 

          8   gatherers.  Over the past 100 years, our once 

          9   thriving way of life was almost eliminated by groups 

         10   who had no respect for our environment and our 

         11   traditional ways and also our culture.  Reserves were 

         12   created and Indian agents controlled our day-to-day 

         13   lives.  Our children were taken away to residential 

         14   schools.  Lobbyists destroyed the fur trade, an 

         15   economy that sustained us.  And finally, the 

         16   Churchill River Diversion flooded our lands.  

         17          We have suffered but slowly we are putting the 

         18   past behind us through new treaties and agreements 

         19   and by taking responsibility for our own destiny.  In 

         20   1908, Nelson House Indian Reserve was created as a 

         21   result of the adhesion by the Nelson House First 

         22   Nation to Treaty number 5.  We were then an isolated 

         23   community but fully dependent on the surrounding land 

         24   and resources.  

         25          Until the late sixties and early seventies, 




                                                                       29



          1   our community didn't have electricity or telephones 

          2   nor running water.  But when we got them, we embraced 

          3   these modern conveniences with open arms.  I still 

          4   remember in the late sixties when we first got 

          5   electricity, looking out at the lights in our small 

          6   community.  I remember the first time I phoned my mom 

          7   from high school in Portage La Prairie.  When I first 

          8   got there, I phoned at home.  This is 1974.  

          9          Prior to 1977, our people continued to depend 

         10   on our traditional economy but the massive flooding 

         11   caused by the Churchill River diversion meant people 

         12   could not fish and hunt as they used to. 

         13          In the early eighties, the fur lobbyists began 

         14   its campaign and the price of fur plummeted, taking 

         15   our industry with it.  It didn't take long for social 

         16   chaos to set in with an increase in alcohol 

         17   consumption, suicides and other related social 

         18   problems.  

         19          In 1977, the Northern Flood Agreement was 

         20   signed and it brought a lot of hope to our people.  

         21   But the implementation of this agreement was slow and 

         22   very frustrating.  By the fall of 1992, we felt we 

         23   had to decide to look for a new approach in order to 

         24   bring benefits for our community.  Our community took 

         25   charge.  We appointed a local negotiation team from 




                                                                       30



          1   Nelson House and we hired consultants and advisors.  

          2   We worked to find solutions.  We didn't listen to 

          3   people who had never even visited our community but 

          4   who still thought they knew what was best for us.  

          5          We looked after our own best interests.  We 

          6   entered into comprehensive negotiations and finally 

          7   in 1976, we settled our negotiations and developed a 

          8   compensation package which not only provided economic 

          9   support but gave us control over development of 

         10   resources in our traditional lands.  We will never be 

         11   fully compensated for our losses but we have moved 

         12   forward to create a better future for our children 

         13   and our grandchildren. 

         14          We cannot forget the past but we must focus on 

         15   our future.  With close to 5,000 members, we have a 

         16   rapidly growing population.  Over 60 per cent of our 

         17   people are under 30 years.  Half of our members are 

         18   of school age.  One-third of our adults have less 

         19   than a grade 9 education.  Our rate of unemployment 

         20   is five times the provincial average.  We must 

         21   address these issues.  

         22          Today is an important step in this process.  

         23   What we have gained through long negotiations and 

         24   hard work over the past few years has given us the 

         25   ability and the means to be in a position to jointly 




                                                                       31



          1   develop the proposed Wuskwatim Generation and 

          2   Transmission Project with Manitoba Hydro.  We are 

          3   very proud that our proposed development respects the 

          4   environment and our traditional way of life while 

          5   providing opportunities that will offer a brighter 

          6   future for our people and be good for Manitoba's 

          7   economy.  And we believe this project proposed to be 

          8   built within our traditional territory will help 

          9   provide after our own interests towards 

         10   self-sufficiency.  It will also provide for our young 

         11   people as opportunities they deserve to have basic 

         12   opportunities other Canadians take for granted.  We 

         13   believe this project will be among the things that 

         14   will help us fulfil our dream of self-sufficiency.    

         15          We also believe this project will be safe for 

         16   our water, lands, plants and animals and for the 

         17   people of Northern Manitoba where we live.  This is 

         18   important to us because the north is our home, our 

         19   backyard.  Just as the south where your cottages and 

         20   lake homes provide you with a spiritual place to be, 

         21   the north is our spiritual place. 

         22          So in approaching this project, we have been 

         23   especially concerned to do it right.  We have made 

         24   our decisions independently to serve the interests of 

         25   Nisichawayasihk people whom we represent.  Since we 




                                                                       32



          1   began this process, we have heard more radical 

          2   opponents to the projects speak of environmental 

          3   terrorism, racism and a new colonialism implying that 

          4   we are incapable of looking after our own interests 

          5   towards self-sufficiency.  

          6          Whatever the motivation for proposing this 

          7   development, I think these groups are engaged in what 

          8   is for us economic terrorism.  The Nisichawayasihk 

          9   Cree Nation stands to lose a once in a lifetime 

         10   opportunity to be self-sufficient because of the 

         11   interference of these outside sources.  

         12          Big corporations are not exploited in the 

         13   Nisichawayasihk Cree Nation as some opponents of this 

         14   project have alleged.  We have firsthand experience 

         15   with hydroelectric developments.  We understand what 

         16   can happen when the environmental issues are not 

         17   fully considered and provisions aren't made for 

         18   people to prosper with training and job 

         19   opportunities.  Everything gained from our experience 

         20   is part of where we are today.  We have been 

         21   cautious.  We have been very careful and I'm sure to 

         22   Hydro's frustration, sometimes we have not just 

         23   accepted Hydro's plans, in many ways we have modified 

         24   their plans in important ways. 

         25          As an example, our First Nation was 




                                                                       33



          1   influential in the decision for the low-head design 

          2   chosen for Wuskwatim.  It is a design that would 

          3   create the least amount of flooding of any 

          4   hydroelectric project ever developed in Manitoba.  

          5   Less than one-half square kilometre.  Or for people 

          6   in the city that understand maybe same size as an 

          7   average golf course.  

          8          We played a direct role in undertaking 

          9   environmental impact assessment studies which are at 

         10   the centre of this Clean Environment Commission 

         11   hearing.  Not only did the assessment involve the 

         12   latest scientific methods but the process 

         13   incorporated the traditional knowledge of our elders 

         14   and resource users and other Aboriginal people in the 

         15   area.  Our spiritual beliefs and culture are part of 

         16   this traditional knowledge.  

         17          For example, two possible routes for an access 

         18   road to the generating station were eliminated 

         19   because one was too close to a spiritual site while 

         20   the other route would have been too close where there 

         21   was an area where Caribou had been sited.  Like any 

         22   development project anywhere, there will be change.  

         23   But our studies prepared cooperatively with Manitoba 

         24   Hydro show the project will have little impact on the 

         25   lands, plants and animals.  




                                                                       34



          1          I am thankful our First Nation and our Cree 

          2   people were shown this respect for our knowledge and 

          3   for our culture.  That was a crucial factor in our 

          4   decision to proceed to participate in this project.  

          5   Because based on the our past experience resulting 

          6   from the Churchill River Diversion, we are not 

          7   prepared to move ahead at any cost although we 

          8   believe we are a very progressive First Nation, 

          9   economically and socially.  We face many of the same 

         10   challenges of other First Nations in Manitoba and 

         11   across Canada, poverty, inadequate health care and 

         12   social services, poor housing and lack of training, 

         13   skills and jobs.  So we need to find ways to develop 

         14   and sustain a secure economic base for our First 

         15   Nation that provides the social and community 

         16   services we need along with meaningful well-paying 

         17   jobs and opportunities for our people and especially 

         18   for our youth.  

         19          For us, economic support is not abstract.  Its 

         20   absence is a daily soul-destroying reality.  This 

         21   development gives us an opportunity to become a 

         22   partner with up to 33 per cent ownership of a project 

         23   in our resource area that will provide us long-term 

         24   stable revenues.  It is a tangible step into a 

         25   brighter future. 




                                                                       35



          1          The new Atoskiwin Training & Employment Centre 

          2   of excellence in our community is already a direct 

          3   benefit of the development process leading to 

          4   Wuskwatim.  The centre offers training for jobs and 

          5   skills needed in the north.  Whether or not Wuskwatim 

          6   goes ahead, it provides our people with the 

          7   opportunity to participate in the broader economy of 

          8   Manitoba and of Canada.  So the centre, people have 

          9   already completed training and are engaged in work 

         10   experience.  Once it is fully operational, it will 

         11   become part of the post-secondary training program 

         12   for Northern Manitoba with a capacity of 100 students 

         13   per year.  

         14          Our NCN members and northern Aboriginal people 

         15   will have the required skills, will be given 

         16   preferences for the jobs on the project.  Jobs will 

         17   include heavy equipment operators, carpenters, 

         18   electricians, labourers, clerical, catering and 

         19   others.  Apprenticeships and journeyman opportunities 

         20   will provide for long-term skills that will serve our 

         21   members long after Wuskwatim is built.  The project 

         22   also offers contract opportunities for new and 

         23   existing First Nation businesses to supply products 

         24   and services needed for the project. 

         25          This may provide incentives for NCN 




                                                                       36



          1   entrepreneurs to establish businesses that provide 

          2   income and create jobs for others.  As Chief in 

          3   Council of NCN, we establish a future development 

          4   portfolio, currently held by Councillor Elvis Thomas 

          5   and also our own future development team that was 

          6   assembled to work towards the development of this 

          7   project.  We lead and direct our own independent 

          8   legal team, communication consultants and technical 

          9   and scientific advisors to ensure the project is 

         10   environmentally responsible.  Any partnership with 

         11   Hydro is equitable and beneficial to our people.  

         12          In 2001, a majority of NCN members voted to 

         13   approve an agreement in principle to development 

         14   Wuskwatim with Manitoba Hydro and we have worked with 

         15   Hydro to prepare and submit what we believe to be 

         16   possibly the most comprehensive environmental impact 

         17   statements ever undertaken in Manitoba.  We have also 

         18   just completed a Summary of Understanding or SOU 

         19   which is like a preview of the final project 

         20   development agreement. 

         21          Even though we are here today at the CEC with 

         22   Hydro, our people will still have the opportunity to 

         23   vote on the final project development agreement in a 

         24   secret ballot referendum to decide if NCN will 

         25   participate.  It will be their decision.  The 




                                                                       37



          1   planning and cooperative work that has gone into this 

          2   project between Manitoba Hydro and ourselves 

          3   represents a ground-breaking positive approach that 

          4   we believe will change the way resource development 

          5   is done in Manitoba forever.  We wanted to dispel the 

          6   issues of the Churchill River Diversion and replace 

          7   litigation, confrontation with cooperation, 

          8   understanding and trust.  

          9          In conclusion, we believe this is a good 

         10   project and an opportunity for our First Nation,  

         11   everyone in the north and all of Manitobans.  We ask 

         12   that you consider the hopes and aspirations of our 

         13   people when you hear from the groups opposed to this 

         14   project.  They may be well-intentioned but in my 

         15   mind, they are misguided if they think they represent 

         16   our best interests.  

         17          The evidence we present you with today will 

         18   demonstrate that the extensive joint planning 

         19   undertaken by NCN and Manitoba Hydro can positively 

         20   impact resource development to the benefit of all 

         21   Manitobans. 

         22          Wuskwatim can create the conditions to allow 

         23   our people to bring their full talents to the world.  

         24   This will help everyone in Manitoba.  It can be our 

         25   gift and our legacy to our children and grandchildren 




                                                                       38



          1   and their children for many generations to come. 

          2          That is my vision and a dream of our council 

          3   and of my people.  With that, Mr. Chairman, I thank 

          4   you.

          5          THE CHAIRMAN:  Thank you very much. 

          6          MR. ADAMS:  Good morning, Mr. Chair, 

          7   Commission members, ladies and gentlemen.  My name is 

          8   Ken Adams and I'm the vice-president of Power Supply 

          9   of Manitoba Hydro.  I am the member of Manitoba Hydro 

         10   Senior Executive Team and I have primary 

         11   responsibility for the projects that are under 

         12   consideration today.  

         13          Today we are pleased to present for your 

         14   review the Wuskwatim Generating and Transmission 

         15   Projects.  We look forward to what I'm sure will be a 

         16   very vigorous discussion and we are confident that 

         17   when we're finished, we'll be able to demonstrate the 

         18   essential merits of the project and be able to 

         19   proceed with it. 

         20          Assuming that we do proceed with these 

         21   projects, it will be the first northern generating 

         22   station that we have started construction in nearly 

         23   20 years.  And in that 20 year period, we have 

         24   thoroughly reviewed our approach to such development. 

         25   Our new way of cooperating with local Aboriginal 




                                                                       39



          1   people and our commitment to environmental 

          2   stewardship is embodied in our present plans. 

          3          In 1992, Manitoba Hydro became one of the 

          4   first major companies in Canada to adopt its own 

          5   Principles of Sustainable Development.  These 

          6   principles enlisted in the Sustainable Development 

          7   Report included in the April 2003 need an alternative 

          8   submission.  Along with our corporate vision and 

          9   mission statement, our Sustainable Development 

         10   Principles provide the backdrop against which we 

         11   evaluate all potential projects and programs.  

         12          Hydro has an extremely rigorous internal 

         13   decision-making process.  In part, it's designed to 

         14   measure a project against these criteria and in part, 

         15   it's designed to ensure that any recommendation 

         16   regarding major investments that we, as the executive 

         17   management team, make to our Board is in the best 

         18   overall interest of our customers.  

         19          Manitoba Hydro operates in a complex 

         20   continually evolving business environment that 

         21   reflects the changing and diverse perspectives of our 

         22   customers, our owners and other stakeholders 

         23   throughout the province and throughout the rest of 

         24   North America. 

         25          Our business environment is also affected by 




                                                                       40



          1   unfolding events throughout North America such as the 

          2   structural changes in the electricity industry and by 

          3   global issues such as climate change.  The Wuskwatim 

          4   project we are proposing has been shaped by all of 

          5   these influences. 

          6          We firmly believe that the Wuskwatim 

          7   development is an excellent project when reviewed 

          8   from each of the environmental, the financial and a 

          9   social perspective.  That is the concept of the 

         10   so-called triple bottom line that is prominent in 

         11   most areas of corporate governments these days. 

         12          I personally have worked in the hydro power 

         13   industry for nearly 40 years and I'm convinced that 

         14   this project is a prime example of sustainable 

         15   development action.  It reflects the core values and 

         16   strategic priorities recommended by the World 

         17   Commission on dams in 2000 and is fully consistent 

         18   with the International Hydro Power Association 

         19   sustainability guidelines just released. 

         20          As I noted earlier, Wuskwatim marks the 

         21   introduction of a fundamentally new and different 

         22   approach to development of Manitoba's hydroelectric 

         23   resources.  

         24          I would like to emphasize five aspects.  The 

         25   first is that we're proposing to advance its 




                                                                       41



          1   inservice date by about ten years from what would 

          2   have been required if we were building only to meet 

          3   Native Manitoba customers.  This will help us 

          4   continue to participate in the highly competitive and 

          5   very lucrative export market.  Continued success in 

          6   this export market is needed to allow us to continue 

          7   to offer low electricity prices in Manitoba.  

          8          The financial success of the project requires 

          9   us to construct it on schedule, to operate it in 

         10   accordance with the various licences and agreements 

         11   and to continue to sell the electricity it produces 

         12   profitably to wholesale customers in other provinces 

         13   and in the United States.  Collectively with a lot of 

         14   experience in all of these areas and I'm confident 

         15   that our managers and their staff are fully capable 

         16   of ensuring that the project will be a success. 

         17          The second aspect is that based in large part 

         18   on what we learned through our consultations, 

         19   Wuskwatim has been deliberately designed as a low 

         20   impact project.  As Chief Primrose said, the original 

         21   design was revised to reduce the size from about 350 

         22   to 200 megawatts to virtually eliminate any new 

         23   flooding.  Its operation will be restricted to daily 

         24   run of river in order to limit water level 

         25   fluctuations both upstream and downstream.  Also 




                                                                       42



          1   through the consultation process, we have selected 

          2   transmission line, access road and construction camp 

          3   locations that respect environmental, cultural and 

          4   local community values.  

          5          The third aspect is the unprecedented extent 

          6   of the consultation that has taken place.  Five years 

          7   ago, we initiated monthly meetings with members of a 

          8   number of Manitoba environmental organizations to 

          9   discuss issues and concerns related to potential new 

         10   Manitoba Hydro developments. 

         11          While these meetings were not part of the 

         12   formal consultation process for the Wuskwatim 

         13   project, they provided an excellent forum for 

         14   exchanges of information and perspectives on future 

         15   energy development and they have helped shape our 

         16   approach.  

         17          We started consulting with NCN in 1998.  

         18   Subsequently, in 2001, well starting in 2001, 

         19   Manitoba Hydro and NCN have consulted with every 

         20   community in the project area whether they are in the 

         21   immediate vicinity, upstream, downstream, near the 

         22   proposed transmission facilities or just in the 

         23   region and interested in the project.  

         24          There has been unprecedented website access 

         25   for all interested parties since 2002.  More recently 




                                                                       43



          1   all of the materials that have been filed for this 

          2   review have been placed on the website.  In January 

          3   2003, we participated in an ENGO forum and an open 

          4   house in Winnipeg.  

          5          In June 2003, approximately six months after 

          6   filing with this Commission, we held a three day 

          7   workshop with the federal/provincial TAC.  And in 

          8   July, we held another workshop with a number of 

          9   participants in this review.  

         10          Excluding our meetings with NCN members and 

         11   excluding the meetings with the regulatory 

         12   authorities and excluding proceedings in front of 

         13   this Commission, we have participated in almost 100 

         14   meetings with various interested parties.  And to 

         15   date, we file binders with over 10 lineal feet of 

         16   written material explaining the project. 

         17          I doubt there has ever been a comparable 

         18   project in Canada with such a comprehensive community 

         19   consultation and public participation process. 

         20          The forth difference from previous projects is 

         21   that we have worked with the provincial and federal 

         22   governments and the community situated along the 

         23   Burntwood and lower Nelson rivers to establish a job 

         24   training program well before the project starts.  

         25   This program will ensure that Northern Aboriginal 




                                                                       44



          1   people can develop the skills needed to qualify for 

          2   the higher skilled, higher paid jobs that will be 

          3   available on this project and on any future projects 

          4   that we or others may undertake in the region.  It 

          5   will also help in prepare for long-term employment in 

          6   the operation and maintenance of our facilities and 

          7   at other locations. 

          8          The fifth aspect of this project which makes 

          9   it fundamentally different from any that we have ever 

         10   done before and the one for which we are the most 

         11   proud is our partnership arrangement with 

         12   Nisichawayasihk First Nation.  As Chief Primrose 

         13   explained, NCN has participated as a full partner in 

         14   all of the planning activities, the public and 

         15   community consultation process, the open houses, the 

         16   environmental assessments and all other aspects of 

         17   the project.  We look forward to a long and mutually 

         18   beneficial association with NCN. 

         19          Before we move to the detailed presentation of 

         20   the Wuskwatim project, it is appropriate for me to 

         21   confirm Manitoba Hydro's intentions with regard to 

         22   certain other potential sources of electricity 

         23   supply.  We will continue to pursue energy 

         24   conservation and demand management, or PowerSmart as  

         25   we call it, to the maximum extent at which they are 




                                                                       45



          1   economically and financially viable.  We have 

          2   developed the best possible estimates of what is 

          3   achievable and we have provided for the attainment of 

          4   these in our financial plans.  But if it turns out we 

          5   can do better, we will pursue them with vigour and we 

          6   will achieve what we can. 

          7          We will continue to pursue system efficiencies 

          8   in our existing system or supply site enhancement in 

          9   our terminology again to the maximum level of which 

         10   it is economically viable.  We have upgraded most of 

         11   our older facilities over the last 15 years or are in 

         12   the process of upgrading a few of them.  And we are 

         13   reaching the point of diminishing returns.  But 

         14   again, if there's a megawatt hour to be gained or 

         15   saved in the existing system and it is financially 

         16   viable, then we will invest to achieve it.  We 

         17   continue to explore the possibility of 

         18   non-traditional or returned energy sources and we 

         19   have assumed that over the next five years, we will 

         20   be able to purchase or construct at least 250 

         21   megawatts worth.  If and when we're presented with or 

         22   if we can identify a technically and economically 

         23   viable option, we will pursue it.  And again, if 

         24   higher amounts prove to be economic, we won't stop at 

         25   the 250 megawatts.  In fact, we don't see these 




                                                                       46



          1   energy sources as competitors to the Wuskwatim 

          2   project but rather as complimentary.  They are not 

          3   mutually exclusive. 

          4          Returning to Wuskwatim, Hydro is fully aware 

          5   of the importance of these activities in Manitoba and 

          6   that our actions today will leave a legacy for future 

          7   Manitobans.  So are the people we engage to undertake 

          8   the designs, the evaluations and the assessments of 

          9   our projects.  

         10          And I'd like to spend a few minutes to talk 

         11   about these people.  The overwhelming majority of 

         12   people involved in the preparation for the Wuskwatim 

         13   project are Manitobans.  They are very highly 

         14   qualified principled professionals.  They are 

         15   accountable for their work to their peers, to their 

         16   colleagues, to their friends and relatives and to 

         17   future Manitobans.  And in most cases, they will be 

         18   responsible for delivering on the programs and 

         19   projects that they recommend and they will ultimately 

         20   be responsible for dealing with the consequences.  

         21          They do not take these responsibilities 

         22   lightly.  However, recognizing that in some areas we 

         23   need assistance, we do, where appropriate, engage 

         24   experts from other parts of North America to ensure 

         25   that the best available minds have been brought to 




                                                                       47



          1   bear on all aspects of our deliberations. 

          2          Manitoba Hydro and Nisichawayasihk Cree Nation 

          3   are confident that individually and collectively, 

          4   their staff and consultants have performed their work 

          5   very well.  We are confident that in its entirety 

          6   over the next few weeks, the body of work will 

          7   demonstrate Wuskwatim will provide a clean source of 

          8   renewable energy that will displace fossil fuels 

          9   elsewhere in central North America.  It will provide 

         10   financial and reliability benefits to Manitoba 

         11   Hydro's domestic customers and it will be profitable 

         12   to both Manitoba Hydro and NCN.  

         13          We suggest the work will also demonstrate that 

         14   the environmental effects of the project are not 

         15   significant.  And in fact, when viewed on a global 

         16   basis, there is a net environmental benefit.  We will 

         17   demonstrate that the project will provide an economic 

         18   stimulus to Manitoba, particularly in northern 

         19   Manitoba.  And we will show that the risks associated 

         20   with the proposed development are relatively low and 

         21   readily manageable. 

         22          At this point, I will turn the presentation 

         23   over to Councillor Elvis Thomas of NCN who holds a 

         24   future development portfolio amongst others.  And Ed 

         25   Wojczynski who is Manitoba Hydro's Division Manager 




                                                                       48



          1   of Power Planning and Development.  Ed has the 

          2   responsibility for directing all of Manitoba Hydro's 

          3   development planning activities and is the corporate 

          4   executive responsible for overseeing our 

          5   participation in this review.  Ed and Councillor 

          6   Thomas will chair and coordinate NCN and Hydro's 

          7   presentation of the project.  

          8          Mr. Chairman, I thank you.

          9          THE CHAIRMAN:  I thank you, Mr. Adams, and 

         10   Chief Primrose.  And maybe this is a convenient time 

         11   for us to have this first break for a few minutes, a 

         12   ten minute break, while your colleagues get ready to 

         13   continue with the presentation.  Thank you very much 

         14   again.  

         15   

         16          (PROCEEDINGS RECESSED AT 10:16 A.M. AND 

         17           RECONVENED AT 10:30 A.M.)

         18   

         19               THE CHAIRMAN:  I will ask the members

         20   of the presenting panel to introduce themselves to

         21   be sworn in.

         22               MR. WOJCZYNSKI:  Thank you,

         23   Mr. Chairman.  I'm Ed Wojczynski, I'm the division

         24   manager of power planning and development at

         25   Manitoba Hydro, and Councillor Elvis Thomas and




                                                                       49



          1   myself are going to call forward and introduce the

          2   witnesses, if that is suitable.  Mr. Ken Adams,

          3   the vice president of power supply is one of our

          4   witnesses, Ken; and Carolyn Wray, division manager

          5   of treasury and business analysis; Lloyd Kuczek,

          6   division manager of energy management and

          7   conservation; Dave Cormie, manager of power sales

          8   and operations.

          9               THE CHAIRMAN:  Maybe you want to call

         10   the witnesses as they will come up to testify, or

         11   do you want them all up at the front now?

         12               MR. WOJCZYNSKI:  Mr. Grewar had

         13   suggested that we have them all up at once and

         14   have the swearing in of all witnesses at one time,

         15   Mr. Chairman.

         16               THE CHAIRMAN:  Thank you.

         17               MR. THOMAS:  For the other witnesses,

         18   we are calling on Dave Hicks who is in charge of

         19   N.D.Lea.  They are the advisors for the

         20   transmission part of the project.  I have got

         21   George Rempel, who is also sitting here in front

         22   with TetrES.  And we will call upon Cam MacInnes

         23   who works for UNIES in particular with regard to

         24   providing us with engineering advice.  We have got

         25   Cam Osler, who is with Intergroup, and we have got




                                                                       50



          1   Stuart Davies with North/South Consultants, and

          2   then you have myself and Ed Wojczynski.

          3               In terms of the swearing in ceremony,

          4   I will be holding an eagle feather while we do the

          5   swearing in ceremony.  The eagle feather

          6   represents truth, honour and respect in our

          7   culture, and when we do something like this in

          8   public, this is one of the things that we do as

          9   First Nations people.  So I'm going to be holding

         10   one while you swear us in.  Thank you.

         11               MR. GREWAR:  I wonder if I could have

         12   clarification, is Ron Mazur there, please?

         13               I will read the names and then I will

         14   ask you to affirm your truthfulness.  Ken Adams,

         15   Elvis Thomas, Edward Wojczynski, Carolyn Wray, Ron

         16   Mazur, Lloyd Kuczek, Cam Osler, Stuart Davies,

         17   David Hicks, George Rempel, Campbell MacInnes,

         18   David Cormie.

         19   

         20               Ken Adams, Elvis Thomas, Edward

         21               Wojczynski, Carolyn Wray, Ron Mazur,

         22               Lloyd Kuczek, Cam Osler, Stuart

         23               Davies, David Hicks, George Rempel,

         24               Campbell MacInnes, David Cormie:

         25               SWORN




                                                                       51



          1   

          2               MR. WOJCZYNSKI:  We would like to

          3   distribute copies of the presentation now, if that

          4   would be acceptable.  We have copies for the

          5   Commission, and we have copies for everybody in

          6   the audience.  We have put a binder together, a

          7   cerlox binder that has the presentations for the

          8   whole day, for everybody's convenience.

          9               Particularly, recognize that in the

         10   back it will be kind of hard to see the projector,

         11   so we thought that might make it a bit easier for

         12   everybody.  So we are just distributing copies.

         13   If you don't want one, please just indicate that

         14   when the people are coming around.

         15               MR. GREWAR:  We will enter this as a

         16   single exhibit, as the presentation transparencies

         17   or overhead projections, and it will be assigned

         18   number, Manitoba Hydro NCN 1000, so MH/NCN-1000.

         19   

         20               (EXHIBIT MH/NCN-1000:  Presentation

         21               transparencies)

         22   

         23               THE CHAIRMAN:  Thank you, Mr. Grewar.

         24   You may now proceed.

         25               MR. WOJCZYNSKI:  Thank you, Mr. Chair.




                                                                       52



          1               I would like to introduce the

          2   presentations that we are making today.  As you

          3   know, Manitoba Hydro and Nisichawayasihk Cree

          4   Nation have prepared a great deal of information,

          5   over ten feet of binder material.  Today we can't

          6   possibly present everything that we have prepared,

          7   but we can summarize and illustrate for you the

          8   most important things that we have learned in our

          9   work.

         10               We are going to do four presentations

         11   today.  The first presentation will be a

         12   description of the Wuskwatim developments.  It

         13   will give you an overview of what the developments

         14   are, and what they would look like and where they

         15   would be located.  After that, after we have shown

         16   you the what and where of the Wuskwatim

         17   developments, we are going to explain how the

         18   Wuskwatim development fits into the Manitoba power

         19   system and its operation.  We expect to complete

         20   these presentations by lunch time.

         21               After lunch we will be moving to the

         22   need for and alternative justifications for

         23   developing Wuskwatim at this time.  We will then

         24   provide an overview of major issues that we

         25   addressed as our environmental assessment of the




                                                                       53



          1   proposed Wuskwatim development.  Finally, we will

          2   provide a short conclusion and we expect and hope

          3   to have this done by the end of the day.

          4               I would like to now introduce you to

          5   the first presenter, and that's George Rempel from

          6   TetrES Consultants, who will be presenting the

          7   project on behalf the NCN and Manitoba Hydro.

          8               MR. REMPEL:  Thank you,

          9   Mr. Wojczynski.  Is this mike turned on?

         10               I'm going to be describing the two

         11   projects.  We have in this Wuskwatim development

         12   two projects, the generation project and the

         13   transmission project.  Each of these have been

         14   described in very substantial detail in the

         15   individual environmental impact statements and, in

         16   fact, in each of the EIS's there is a supporting

         17   document which describes the project in greater

         18   detail.  What I'm going to be doing is providing

         19   you an overview of the two projects, as the

         20   project description is a very important step in

         21   the environmental assessment.  In fact, it is

         22   typically the first step, you try to understand

         23   how the project will be constructed, how it will

         24   be operated, and then you look at potential

         25   environmental effects.  So I'm going to give you




                                                                       54



          1   this overview today.

          2               Firstly, I will begin by providing

          3   some context.  This is a map of Manitoba which

          4   shows some of the key features of the Manitoba

          5   Hydro system.  We have a Hydro system here that is

          6   primarily hydroelectric based, over 90 percent of

          7   the power generation comes from hydroelectric.

          8   And much of this is dominated by three plants in

          9   the lower Nelson, three plants on the lower

         10   Nelson, 3600 megawatts of power in three plants in

         11   the lower Nelson.  They are primarily fed from

         12   outflows from Lake Winnipeg into the Lower Nelson,

         13   and those are regulated somewhat by Lake Winnipeg

         14   to better conform, better shape the outflows to

         15   the demand of Manitobans.

         16               We also have a Churchill River

         17   Diversion, a good portion of the flows in the

         18   Churchill were diverted into the Rat/Burntwood

         19   system in the early '70's to help feed flows,

         20   deliver flows to these large plants in the Lower

         21   Nelson.

         22               The proposed Wuskwatim generation will

         23   be placed on the Burntwood system, below Notigi,

         24   which is a control structure for the diversion.

         25   It will be 200 megawatts, so it will be about




                                                                       55



          1   4 percent of the overall Manitoba Hydro system

          2   capability.

          3               As I mentioned, 200 megawatts is the

          4   capacity of this station.  It will be Taskinigup

          5   Falls on the Burntwood River.  It will have an

          6   associated access road, it is a critical part of

          7   the construction of the project.  It will also be

          8   a permanent access road in that will help service

          9   the plant after it is in operation.  There will be

         10   a construction camp.  That camp will be dismantled

         11   after construction and the site rehabilitated.

         12   And there will be other infrastructure which we

         13   will describe later.  A six year construction

         14   schedule is contemplated which would result in

         15   first power some time in 2010.

         16               In terms of the transmission project,

         17   with new power comes a need to develop -- to tie

         18   this into the existing distribution system.  So we

         19   have the project here.  It will involve bringing

         20   power from Thompson to the site for construction,

         21   and then lines will be constructed to tie this

         22   plant into the existing lines near Thompson, Snow

         23   Lake and The Pas.  About 350 kilometers of

         24   transmission line will be required to tie this

         25   into the existing system.




                                                                       56



          1               I'm going to turn now to a bit more

          2   detail on the generation project.  This is a

          3   picture of the site showing the outlet of

          4   Wuskwatim Lake and Wuskwatim Falls, and below

          5   these falls are Taskinigup Falls, and this is

          6   where we are proposing to build this dam.  There

          7   is about a one and a half kilometer distance

          8   between these two falls, and the area that Chief

          9   Primrose referred to for new flooding will be

         10   associated in this immediate forebay that we are

         11   talking about here, where the water will be raised

         12   about 7 meters with the construction of the dam,

         13   resulting in some peripheral flooding along the

         14   existing shore line.  I will talk about this in

         15   greater detail later.

         16               This project is located just

         17   downstream of Wuskwatim Lake, Taskinigup Falls.

         18   It is about 37 kilometers from the community of

         19   Nelson House.  This is the resource management

         20   area of Nelson House.  This shows the community of

         21   Nelson House, the community of South Indian Lake,

         22   and this distance here is about 37 kilometers, I

         23   believe it is, from Nelson House to the station,

         24   and the distance from this station to Thompson is

         25   about 45 kilometers.




                                                                       57



          1               Further downstream we have communities

          2   on Split Lake, the York Factory First Nation,

          3   Tataskweyak Cree Nation, and further downstream we

          4   have Gillam.

          5               Now, this plant proposed here for

          6   Wuskwatim will capture about 22 metres of drop or

          7   head.  When we referred to a low head before, we

          8   were talking about the drop that is encountered

          9   across these two falls, and this dam will capture

         10   that head or energy and convert it into

         11   hydroelectric power.

         12               As the Chief and Ken Adams mentioned,

         13   this project has been deliberately designed to be,

         14   to have minimal flooding, it is a low head design.

         15   We will tell you a bit more what that means.  What

         16   it does is it minimizes environmental effects

         17   because the flooding is reduced to about a half a

         18   square kilometer.

         19               This low head design, as I mentioned,

         20   has capacity of about 200 megawatts.  Earlier

         21   options that were considered, considered power

         22   capacity up to 350 megawatts.  So a lot more power

         23   with this high head design, but it also came with

         24   a lot more flooding, about 140 square kilometers,

         25   54 square miles.  So that design was rejected and




                                                                       58



          1   we now have a low head design which in fact has

          2   the smallest amount of flooding of any existing

          3   Hydro plant in the system.

          4               I would like to discuss the water

          5   level changes with this low head design.  I have a

          6   graphic here that shows the typical water profile

          7   below Notigi control structure.  That is the

          8   control structure that controls flows from the

          9   diversion downstream into the Rat/Burntwood

         10   system.

         11               So the brown is the shore line, or the

         12   lake bottom or the river bottom, and we have the

         13   blue showing the typical water line profile,

         14   Threepoint Lake tumbling down the Early Morning

         15   Rapids.  Then again we have falls, Wuskwatim

         16   outlet, Taskinigup Falls, and we have some

         17   additional falls as the river proceeds downstream,

         18   Opegano Lake, and we have Thompson, Birchtree

         19   Lake and then Thompson over here.

         20               What will happen with the new project

         21   is that there will be a dam built in this area

         22   here, and this will increase the water levels

         23   between Taskinigup Falls, and this area here,

         24   shown in the heavy blue.  So you will have this

         25   immediate forebay, this is where the flooding will




                                                                       59



          1   occur, the half square kilometer, and will also

          2   stabilize the water levels on Wuskwatim Lake.

          3   They will be stable in the high end of where they

          4   have been in the last 25 years.  The water level

          5   influence will stop below Early Morning Rapids.

          6   This is what we call a hydraulic break, in that

          7   this water level here will not influence water

          8   levels further upstream either in winter or

          9   summer.

         10               This is again the site that we have

         11   shown earlier, but I'm showing more detail here.

         12   Here is Taskinigup Falls.  This is where the main

         13   dam will be built.  There will be a powerhouse

         14   built over here which will comprise three

         15   turbines, fix play design, there will be a

         16   spillway as well.  So the flows will now be

         17   diverted, shunted over to here where the turbines

         18   will be located, and the flows will typically go

         19   through one or two or three turbines, depending on

         20   how much flow is being taken down the system.  If

         21   the flows exceed the capacity of the turbines, the

         22   three turbines, the spillway will bypass the high

         23   flows and take them down into the river here.

         24               In building this project, most of the

         25   material actually comes from the site.  When this




                                                                       60



          1   excavation is done here, that will yield rock,

          2   soil, clay and silt that will be used for the dam,

          3   and the rock will be used for cofferdams, crushed

          4   for gravel or concrete aggregate.  The only thing

          5   that will be brought into the site in terms of

          6   construction material, rock or earth, will be

          7   granular material, aggregate from an area close by

          8   the access road.  The rest of it will be found on

          9   site.  In fact, there will be extra material

         10   deposited in this area here.  There will be

         11   excavation done here to ease the flow from

         12   Wuskwatim Lake into this immediate forebay to make

         13   it easier for the flow to get to the powerhouse.

         14               When this dam is built, there will be

         15   an increase in water level, I mentioned about 7

         16   metres increase in this area here, that will

         17   result in a band of flooding here of about 25 to

         18   300 metres, depending on the steepness of the

         19   slope here along this shore line.  The shore line

         20   will be cleared in advance of this flooding, and

         21   this is where the half square kilometer of

         22   flooding will occur.  This is a computer rendition

         23   of the same development showing the channel

         24   excavation, the excavated materials being placed

         25   here.  We now see the spillway a bit better here.




                                                                       61



          1   This is where the powerhouse is, and here you see

          2   the three turbines.  So the water will typically

          3   go through those three turbines, either through

          4   one or two or three.  Almost always the flow will

          5   be entirely directed through these turbines.  Only

          6   occasionally will there be a need to spill some

          7   water over the spillway.

          8               I would like to turn now to the

          9   operation of the Churchill River Diversion.

         10   Wuskwatim will not change the operation of the

         11   Churchill River Diversion.  The designing and

         12   planning of this plant is assumed that the

         13   patterns that have existed for the last 25 years

         14   will continue in the future, and that includes the

         15   annual modifications that are made to the interim

         16   licence, where slightly additional flows are

         17   allowed to be diverted from the Churchill River on

         18   the Rat/Burntwood system.  That has been in place

         19   since 1979, and the design assumes that that will

         20   continue.

         21               There will be no change to the CRD

         22   flow patterns.  The amount of flow that is

         23   diverted varies, depending on how much

         24   precipitation and snow melt occurs in the

         25   Churchill River and the Rat/Burntwood systems.  So




                                                                       62



          1   those flow patterns that vary annually will

          2   continue, and the only difference will be that

          3   there will be some daily flow shaping in the local

          4   area associated with the Wuskwatim Generating

          5   Station.  So in the local area there will be small

          6   changes to the water level regime, but not on the

          7   diversion in general.

          8               The flows will normally equal, the

          9   flows in will normally equal the flows out over a

         10   24 hour period.  So on a given Tuesday, Wednesday,

         11   whatever, whatever flow arrived at Wuskwatim Lake

         12   will also have left the lake.

         13               Further on operation, the Wuskwatim

         14   Lake will now be kept pretty much all of the time,

         15   about 97 and a half percent of the time, at about

         16   234 metres above sea level.  Right now the lake

         17   levels varies from 232.6 to 234.3, about a 1.7

         18   metre variation; and that is dependent on the

         19   different flow patterns along the diversion

         20   itself.  With this project, it will be held pretty

         21   constant at 234, the higher end of what it

         22   experiences now.

         23               The generation station will operate in

         24   what we call a modified run-of-the-river mode.  A

         25   true run-of-the-river mode means that all flow, as




                                                                       63



          1   it arrives at the station, would be sent out the

          2   station.  By modified run-of-the-river, we mean

          3   there will be various units on or off during the

          4   day.  And that is to take advantage of the

          5   efficiency of the turbines.  It is something like

          6   running your car, depending on the speed that you

          7   are going, either you are in first gear, second

          8   gear, or third gear.  Depending on the flow that

          9   arrives here, there will be either one, two, or

         10   three units operating, there will be intervals

         11   during the day when there might be say three units

         12   operating, that is the best efficiency, and other

         13   times it will be two units.  And that will reflect

         14   in small changes in the Wuskwatim Lake water level

         15   and further downstream.  Downstream the plant

         16   level and flows will vary depending on how many

         17   turbines are in operation.

         18               I'm going to take some time to show

         19   you where those variations will occur using this

         20   map.  And just for future reference or later

         21   reference, this is the same map that you see here

         22   on a different scale.  Just to give you some

         23   orientation, Notigi is actually over here, off the

         24   map.  Here we have Threepoint Lake, there is

         25   Footprint Lake and the community of Nelson House.




                                                                       64



          1   As we proceed downstream on the Burntwood River,

          2   we have the Early Morning Rapids that we showed

          3   earlier.  Here are some ancillary lakes to

          4   Wuskwatim, Sesep, Cranberry.  Here is Wuskwatim

          5   Lake itself.  There is the generating station

          6   proposed site, and then we have the Burntwood

          7   River continuing through Opegano Lake, Birchtree

          8   Lake and Thompson.  And this distance here is

          9   about 45 kilometers, this distance here is about

         10   37, to give you some scale.

         11               I would like to show you on this map

         12   then how this station here, placed at this site

         13   here, will affect water levels in this area.

         14   Firstly, there will be no changes in the water

         15   level fluctuations on Threepoint Lake or Footprint

         16   Lake.  These areas are upstream of the Early

         17   Morning Rapids, that is a control point, so there

         18   will be no change in water levels as have been

         19   experienced in the last 25 years in that area.

         20               Going further downstream from this

         21   site here, going up to Early Morning Rapids, that

         22   is where the water level will be held very

         23   constant, almost always at the upper end of its

         24   present range, 234 metres.  There will be small

         25   daily fluctuations, depending again as to when




                                                                       65



          1   one, two, or three turbines are in place, and when

          2   they are switched on or off.  So that will be

          3   about 5 inches or so, that is excluding wind and

          4   wave effects.  So it will be a very stable water

          5   regime upstream of the site itself.

          6               Just downstream, that is where you are

          7   going to see more variation, because it is a

          8   narrow river system here, and again it will depend

          9   on what units are in operation.  There the

         10   variation will be about 1.3 metres under normal

         11   open water operating conditions.  And that begins

         12   to dissipate as you go down through the falls and

         13   to Opegano Lake.  At Opegano the median daily

         14   water level variation will be about 4 inches, .1

         15   metres, and the maximum of 1 and a half feet or

         16   .45 metres.  As the river flows go further

         17   downstream, by the time you get to Birchtree Lake,

         18   the daily water levels will not be noticeable in

         19   terms of variation.  It will be about .1 metres

         20   again excluding wind and wave effects, that is

         21   about 4 inches of daily variation.

         22               In terms of the access road, that is

         23   an important component of this development.  It

         24   will involve 48 kilometers of a permanent access

         25   road, a robust road, a key part of the structure




                                                                       66



          1   construction, it will continue in operation

          2   permanently.  There will be a construction camp

          3   that will house at the peak about 625 people, that

          4   will be a temporary one.

          5               The preferred locations for the camp

          6   and the access road were identified by

          7   representatives of Hydro and NCN, and a lot of

          8   consideration went into it, the Chief mentioned

          9   various alternatives were ruled out because of

         10   sacred sites or sensitive areas for the

         11   environment -- environmental effects were

         12   considered, the benefits and drawbacks, whether

         13   access would be improved as a benefit or if it

         14   would be a drawback.  Effects on the cost and

         15   schedule were obviously considered.  Traditional

         16   knowledge, as I mentioned, was a big factor.  And

         17   overall, the road and camp were selected in terms

         18   of sustainability.

         19               This shows the location of the access

         20   road, this is PR 391.  There is a 48-mile access

         21   road to the site through largely uninhabited area.

         22   We have aggregate sites in this area here.  They

         23   are not unique to the area, but there are located

         24   in a good area, a good site to access those and

         25   bring them on to the site for construction




                                                                       67



          1   purposes.

          2               There has been a lot of interest in

          3   controlling access because it is putting a road

          4   into a new area.  Hydro and NCN have prepared an

          5   access management plan which identifies ways that

          6   you can maximize the positive sides of this

          7   access road and minimize the concerns.  This plan,

          8   as I say, has just been developed.  It will

          9   specify how access will be managed, it will be

         10   relatively easy to do this during construction,

         11   but it will also consider the operation aspects.

         12   And the intent is to keep the benefits, which will

         13   include providing access for resource harvesting,

         14   but with it there are some concerns about

         15   overhunting, overfishing, maybe vandalism.  And

         16   this management plan will describe how that can be

         17   mitigated.

         18               I would like to turn now to the

         19   Transmission Project.  As I mentioned, with new

         20   power comes a need to connect this generation

         21   source into the existing system.  We have Thompson

         22   over here, there is an existing station there, a

         23   switching station.  We have existing stations at

         24   Snow Lake, and at Ralls Island at The Pas.  What

         25   is contemplated is that there will be a new




                                                                       68



          1   station built just south of Thompson called the

          2   Birchtree Station, and there will be lines built

          3   firstly to bring power in, and then to connect the

          4   station into these new and existing sites.  So we

          5   will have about 350 kilometers of new transmission

          6   line built that will connect into the very

          7   substantial infrastructure that exists in this

          8   area, improve reliability, and get the power out

          9   for export as well.

         10               Transmission lines are actually quite

         11   flexible.  They have to connect to the stations,

         12   but in between there is a large amount of

         13   flexibility, and picking the routes for these

         14   transmission lines is a big part of the

         15   environmental assessment process.  This route

         16   selection balances the biophysical,

         17   socio-economic, technical and cost perspectives,

         18   and public input is a very big part of this

         19   process.  That public input has involved local

         20   First Nations, Aboriginal people, elected

         21   officials, environmental groups, resource users,

         22   and a general public in firstly identifying

         23   potential routes, and then the selection of the

         24   preferred route.  The whole aim is to reduce the

         25   environmental affects, avoid sensitive areas, and




                                                                       69



          1   try to take advantage of benefits where those come

          2   about with the line.

          3               Alternative routes were compared based

          4   on traditional knowledge, and the Chief gave a

          5   number of examples of that this morning.  Local

          6   input, they were compared based on the effects on

          7   people and their activities, effects on the

          8   environment, and as I mentioned, the technical

          9   limitations and costs.  Routes were compared, and

         10   ultimately a preferred route was selected which

         11   would minimize disruption to the people and the

         12   environment, and meet the technical and cost

         13   considerations.

         14               This map shows the preferred routes.

         15   Again, we will start at Thompson.  This shows the

         16   proposed Birchtree new station.  Here is the

         17   Wuskwatim site with a new station at the site.

         18   Then we have the Snow Lake location with the

         19   Herblet Lake existing switching station, and the

         20   station at The Pas.  The first leg of transmission

         21   lines will be built from Thompson into the site, a

         22   230 kV, that is 200,000 volts transmission line

         23   between Wuskwatim and the station.  It is about

         24   45 kilometers long.  It will be the first line

         25   built.  We will take power into the site.  And it




                                                                       70



          1   will consist of steel structures, about 38 metres

          2   high, about 4 per mile, a right-of-way of about 60

          3   metres, which is cleared.  Some revegetation is

          4   allowed, but it is trimmed to avoid contact with

          5   the lines.  There will also be a 230 kV line from

          6   Snow Lake to The Pas, 165 kilometers.  Again, the

          7   same kind of single tower line.  And there will be

          8   another line, double line actually in this area

          9   here between the station and Snow Lake.  So the

         10   right-of-way here is a bit larger, 110 metres.

         11   These lines are serviced by helicopter in terms of

         12   maintenance.  And this line will be about

         13   137 kilometers, so we have about 350 kilometers of

         14   line in total.

         15               To give you some idea of costs, the

         16   projected in-service costs, considering capital

         17   cost and interest during construction, are about

         18   800 million for the generation facility, and about

         19   180 million for the transmission works.  That does

         20   not include the Herblet Lake to Ralls Island line

         21   which will be required in any event.  So we have

         22   about a billion dollars of construction, and that

         23   clearly relates to a lot of economic activity, and

         24   we will be discussing that this afternoon.

         25               That concludes an overview of the




                                                                       71



          1   project description, and I will turn it back to

          2   Mr. Wojczynski, unless there is questions of

          3   clarification.

          4               MR. WOJCZYNSKI:  Mr. Chairman, if it

          5   is acceptable to you, I would like to introduce

          6   the system operations presentation by Dave Cormie.

          7   Should I proceed?

          8               We have seen issues raised in the

          9   process, in our review process and in our

         10   consultations about system operations and the

         11   potential for changes that may result from

         12   Wuskwatim operation -- pardon me, from changes in

         13   the Manitoba Hydro system operation with the

         14   addition of Wuskwatim.  By potential changes,

         15   parties have referred to the water regime changes,

         16   or that is changes in the water level and water

         17   flows, resulting from the operation of the

         18   Manitoba Hydro power system, with the addition of

         19   Wuskwatim.  The issues here go to describing how

         20   will we, Manitoba Hydro, operate the system.  More

         21   specifically in the context of the Wuskwatim

         22   project, as just described by George Rempel, we

         23   are talking about potential changes in the water

         24   regime, again the levels and the flows, outside

         25   the Wuskwatim water regime study area that George




                                                                       72



          1   has described.  In other words, as George had

          2   indicated, there will be changes from Early

          3   Morning Rapids down to here, and that was studied,

          4   but now David is going to be talking about the

          5   changes outside of that area.  So David is

          6   going be -- David Cormie is going to be discussing

          7   the regime change outside of the study area that

          8   George had talked about.

          9               As George had indicated, the Wuskwatim

         10   development is not expected to cause any

         11   perceptible changes in the CRD water regime

         12   outside of the study area; and secondly, is not

         13   expected to cause any perceptible changes in the

         14   water regime associated with the Lake Winnipeg

         15   Regulation operation.

         16               In response to questions about these

         17   conclusions that we discussed earlier in the

         18   process, Manitoba Hydro carried out a more

         19   detailed review of possible system issues related

         20   to the operation of the power supply with

         21   Wuskwatim, and we met in the past year with

         22   Pimicikamak advisors and others to discuss the

         23   results of this review.

         24               This review was lead by Mr. Cormie,

         25   who is the division manager responsible for




                                                                       73



          1   operation of the Manitoba Hydro's power system and

          2   for its export marketing.  He will provide you now

          3   with a summary of our review.  These details have

          4   been reported elsewhere in our filings, and the

          5   supplemental filings provided in August and

          6   October of 2003, and also are addressed in the

          7   subsequent interrogatory responses that we have

          8   already filed.  I give you Mr. Cormie.

          9               MR. CORMIE:  Thank you, Ed.

         10               As Mr. Wojczynski had indicated, the

         11   addition of Wuskwatim is not expected to lead to

         12   any perceptible changes in water regimes beyond

         13   the study area.  In order to help understand why

         14   we came to that conclusion, I want to take the

         15   opportunity this morning to take you through a

         16   description of the Manitoba power system.  I want

         17   to discuss how we matched the electricity supply

         18   to the demand on a daily and hourly and seasonal

         19   basis.  I want to talk about the major factors

         20   that lead to water levels, water level changes.

         21   In particular, I want to speak about the operation

         22   of the Churchill River Diversion and the Lake

         23   Winnipeg Regulation projects.  I also want to talk

         24   about what our expectation is for water level

         25   change as a result of Wuskwatim, and cumulative




                                                                       74



          1   effects.  And I will wrap up my presentation in

          2   discussing some conclusions.

          3               The Manitoba power system has 16

          4   generating stations, 14 hydro, two

          5   thermal-electric power plants, with the installed

          6   capacity of 540 megawatts.  Wuskwatim will add

          7   200 megawatts to our production capability.  It

          8   will represent approximately a 4 percent increase

          9   in production capability.

         10               The 14 hydro stations in the Manitoba

         11   Hydro system have an installed capacity of around

         12   4,900 megawatts.  The stations were installed over

         13   the last 100 years.  So approximately

         14   500 megawatts of generating capacity on the

         15   Winnipeg River in southern Manitoba, so

         16   approximately 500 megawatts at the Grand Rapids

         17   Generating Station at the outlet of Saskatchewan

         18   River as it flows into Lake Winnipeg,

         19   approximately 500 megawatts between Jenpeg and

         20   Kelsey on the upper Nelson River.  There is 10

         21   megawatts of capability at the two Laurie River

         22   stations, on the Laurie River which feeds into the

         23   Churchill River, but by far the largest capacity

         24   is on the lower Nelson at three large stations

         25   with the combined capacity of around




                                                                       75



          1   3,600 megawatts.

          2               On the lower Nelson, Manitoba Hydro

          3   has 80 percent of its production, hydro production

          4   capability.  That hydro production is brought

          5   south to serve the Manitoba load and the export

          6   load primarily through a 600-kilometer high

          7   voltage direct current transmission system that

          8   collects the generation from the Lower Nelson

          9   plants and brings it south to Winnipeg, to our

         10   terminal station at Dorsey.  At that point the

         11   power is converted from direct current into

         12   alternating current and is fed into the North

         13   American electric grid at that point.

         14               A key control point for the Manitoba

         15   water system and for the flows on the Nelson River

         16   is the Jenpeg control dam.  75 percent of the

         17   water that flows down the Nelson River comes from

         18   Lake Winnipeg.  The dam at Jenpeg allows Manitoba

         19   Hydro to control that flow in order to match the

         20   supply of energy to the expected demand.  It takes

         21   approximately 4 to 6 weeks for water released at

         22   Jenpeg to work its way down along the Nelson

         23   River, through the lakes and along the river,

         24   before it arrives at the Lower Nelson plants.  So

         25   water has to be released in advance of the power




                                                                       76



          1   need, four to six weeks in advance, in

          2   anticipation for the demand of power at the Lower

          3   Nelson stations.

          4               The second critical component of the

          5   water management system that feeds the northern

          6   generating stations is the Churchill River

          7   Diversion.  There is a control structure at Notigi

          8   which controls the flow of water, controls the

          9   diversion of water from the Churchill River, from

         10   the Southern Indian Lake reservoir, into the

         11   Burntwood River, as it flows towards the Lower

         12   Nelson station.  There is a control dam at the

         13   Missi Falls, at the northern outlook of Southern

         14   Indian Lake.  That dam operates to block the flow

         15   and allow the water to be diverted south into the

         16   Nelson River.

         17               Similar to the Lake Winnipeg project,

         18   it take several weeks, three to four weeks, for

         19   water that is released from the Notigi dam to work

         20   its way down the Burntwood River and arrive at the

         21   Lower Nelson generating stations.

         22               In a normal water year, the

         23   hydroelectric plants in Manitoba are fully capable

         24   of meeting the entire demand of the province and

         25   fulfilling all of our obligations in the export




                                                                       77



          1   market.  We don't always have high water years.

          2   In times of drought, Manitoba Hydro has two,

          3   operates two thermal plants at Brandon and

          4   Selkirk, and these plants provide 500 megawatts of

          5   generating capacity that is independent of the

          6   water flows, the rainfalls, and can be operated --

          7   we burn coal and natural gas at the Brandon and

          8   Selkirk stations.  They operate as backup plants

          9   to the hydroelectric system.

         10               A critical component of the Manitoba

         11   Hydro system are our interconnections to

         12   neighboring markets, to Ontario to the east, to

         13   Saskatchewan to the west.  The prime connection is

         14   to the United States.  We have 2,000 almost

         15   2,200 megawatts of interconnected capability with

         16   with the U.S. market.  Over 50 percent of Manitoba

         17   Hydro's production capability can be sold into the

         18   neighboring markets.  Not only do these

         19   interconnections provide us with an outlet for our

         20   surplus power, they also provide for an energy

         21   supply during low flow years.  And a good example

         22   is what we have done this year, become a major

         23   importer of power to serve our needs during this

         24   low flow period.

         25               This chart shows the history of water




                                                                       78



          1   flows, beginning back in 1912 up to present.  It

          2   is expressed as percent of the long term average

          3   flow.  I have indicated on this chart -- the

          4   lowest flow period on record, extreme drought,

          5   when the water supply was as low as 56 percent of

          6   the long term average.  I have also shown the

          7   highest flow years, record flood conditions in

          8   1974, when the water supply is as much as

          9   142 percent of the long term average; also showing

         10   the flood of the century in 1997 -- it wasn't a

         11   record, but it was very close to the record of

         12   1974 -- and also indicating the flows that we have

         13   experienced in the last year where water supply

         14   was just above 60 percent of the long term

         15   average.  What you can see from this chart is that

         16   the water supply varies over time, ranging from

         17   very low to very high.  Manitoba Hydro must be

         18   able to meet its obligations to serve its

         19   customers even under the lowest flow conditions.

         20   And we described those low flow conditions as the

         21   dependable flow.  It is the flow that we can

         22   depend upon to serve our firm power demands.

         23               This bar chart shows the production

         24   capability of the Manitoba power system as it

         25   varies between minimum flows, or the dependable




                                                                       79



          1   flow condition, to the highest flows, as occurred

          2   in 1974, and in the middle bar shows what the

          3   average production capability of the system is.

          4               We described the energy capability of

          5   the system in units of kilowatt hours.  In a

          6   normal water year, the power system will generate

          7   around 32 TWh of electricity.  In the higher flow

          8   years, it increases up to around 36.  In the

          9   dependable flow condition, the power system is

         10   capable of producing 28 TWh hours of electricity.

         11               We have talked about the need to be

         12   able to serve our firm low requirements even under

         13   dependable flow conditions.  The red bar indicates

         14   that for loads lower than 28, we describe those as

         15   firm loads, if the power supply is greater than

         16   the dependable capability, we will sell that as

         17   interruptible power.  It is not there under all

         18   flow conditions, so we need the right to interrupt

         19   it.  We will serve firm loads from the dependable

         20   capability.  When Manitoba Hydro has insufficient

         21   dependable capability to serve its load, at that

         22   time we need to consider the construction of new

         23   resources.

         24               This next chart shows the variation in

         25   the demand for power over a year, typical year.




                                                                       80



          1   The power demand varies continuously.  There are

          2   moment by moment variations in the demand.

          3   Customers turn their lights on, they turn them

          4   off.  We need generating stations that can produce

          5   more power when you turn your lights on, we need

          6   generating stations that can back down when you

          7   turn your lights off.  There is an hourly pattern,

          8   there is a daily pattern, there is a weekly

          9   pattern, and there is a seasonal pattern to the

         10   power demand.

         11               The hourly and daily matching of the

         12   power demand is primarily done at the three Lower

         13   Nelson generating stations.  The seasonal

         14   variation in power demand is also done at the

         15   Lower Nelson stations, but it is done by managing

         16   the fuel supply, by regulating the flows on the

         17   Nelson River with Lake Winnipeg Regulation.  What

         18   I have shown here is how the power demand on

         19   average in the summertime is lower, shown here at

         20   an average of around 50 GWh per day.  During the

         21   fall season the power demand picks up until it

         22   reaches a peak in the winter time, in December and

         23   January, when people's furnaces are running much

         24   more often.  That additional energy supply that is

         25   needed to serve the load is controlled by




                                                                       81



          1   releasing, is met by releasing more water from

          2   Lake Winnipeg, by using our ability to move water

          3   from the summer season, when there is a large

          4   surplus of water available, to the winter when

          5   there is a greater demand for electricity.

          6               In addition to matching the demand for

          7   Manitoba customers, matching is also required for

          8   our export sales.  The next chart shows how we

          9   expect to match the Wuskwatim output to export

         10   sales.  If we had an export customer who could

         11   take the production of Wuskwatim on a moment by

         12   moment basis, as it was produced, there would be a

         13   perfect match between our ability to generate it

         14   and the export sale.  So if Wuskwatim output

         15   equals the export sale, there would be no change

         16   in overall system operation.  The power would be

         17   generated, it would flow through the transmission

         18   grid, and it would go to the export customer.

         19               We don't expect and we don't plan that

         20   there will be a perfect match between the

         21   production at Wuskwatim and the export sale.

         22   There will be an hourly and a daily mismatch.

         23   Wuskwatim will produce power at nighttime.

         24   Manitoba Hydro intends to store that production at

         25   nighttime, concentrate that electricity production




                                                                       82



          1   in the daytime by increasing the generation at the

          2   Lower Nelson generating stations.  We will not use

          3   the Churchill River Diversion or the Lake Winnipeg

          4   Regulation project to create the match on a hourly

          5   and daily basis.  That match will be done at the

          6   Lower Nelson stations.

          7               The seasonal mismatch between

          8   Wuskwatim production and the export sale will be

          9   done though with Lake Winnipeg Regulation.  It is

         10   expected that in the summertime primarily

         11   Wuskwatim will produce more power than will be

         12   sold to the export customer, and so the additional

         13   Wuskwatim generation has the potential to be

         14   stored and to be moved into the winter season.

         15   And that transfer of summer production, that

         16   transfer of production on a seasonal basis will be

         17   done with Lake Winnipeg.

         18               The next chart shows a typical day of

         19   generation on the Manitoba Hydro system.  This day

         20   was chosen from June when the load variations are

         21   the maximum.  The bottom access shows time of day

         22   from midnight to noon to midnight.  It is a 24

         23   hour period.  Production is lowest at night, our

         24   customers are sleeping, the demand for electricity

         25   is low.  This chart shows production as low as




                                                                       83



          1   about 1,700 megawatts up to about 5:00 o'clock in

          2   the morning.  As people wake and begin their

          3   normal day activities, the demand for power

          4   increases, and the Manitoba power system increases

          5   its production from around 1,700 megawatts up to a

          6   full capability of around 5,000 megawatts, for the

          7   peak demand hours, from about 10:00 o'clock in the

          8   morning until about 10:00 o'clock at night.  And

          9   those we describe as the on peak hours.

         10               Most of the variation between the

         11   overnight minimums and the daily maximum occurs by

         12   changing, increasing the output from the Lower

         13   Nelson generating stations.  Over 90 percent of

         14   the hourly and daily matching of supply to load

         15   occurs by changing the output of those Lower

         16   Nelson plants.

         17               The gray area at the bottom shows how

         18   the other generation in the Manitoba Hydro system

         19   operates relatively constant over the day.  And I

         20   have also shown on here how Wuskwatim generation

         21   is expected to vary over the day.  At night we

         22   expect to run, in this case around 2 units of

         23   operation, increasing to 3 units of operation.

         24   You will see that we've concentrated the output of

         25   Wuskwatim in the top here, and the system needs to




                                                                       84



          1   absorb the production from Wuskwatim during the

          2   nighttime hours.  And it is the Lower Nelson that

          3   then allows us to put that energy into the market

          4   during the daytime.

          5               So what will be the effect of using

          6   the Lower Nelson to match the production from

          7   Wuskwatim to the market needs?  This chart shows

          8   again on a 24-hour scale, from midnight to

          9   midnight, for our Lower Nelson main reservoir,

         10   Stephens Lake -- Stephens Lake operates within a

         11   10 foot range between elevation 453 up to 463.

         12   For the month of June it has a normal 5 foot

         13   operating range.  The blue and red lines show how

         14   that reservoir will be operated over the daily

         15   period with and without the Wuskwatim project.

         16   The effect of balancing the Wuskwatim production,

         17   taking it, absorbing it at nighttime and then

         18   taking it to market in the daytime results in

         19   approximately a quarter inch change in levels on

         20   that reservoir.

         21               So Nelson we have talked about the

         22   hourly and daily match between load and

         23   generation, and how Wuskwatim will affect that.  I

         24   would like to now talk about how Wuskwatim

         25   generation is expected to affect the operation of




                                                                       85



          1   Lake Winnipeg.

          2               The map on the slide is a blow-up of

          3   the north end of Lake Winnipeg, with the Nelson

          4   River leading north through the Playgreen Lakes,

          5   past the Jenpeg control structure, and then in the

          6   upper right-hand corner is Cross Lake as the

          7   Nelson River flows downstream.  The map shows the

          8   location of the control structure at Jenpeg, and

          9   the channels that were constructed as part of the

         10   project.

         11               As I described earlier, Lake Winnipeg

         12   is the seasonal balancing reservoir.  Most of the

         13   water that comes into the Manitoba Hydro system

         14   comes in during the summertime as a result of

         15   spring, snow melt run-off, spring and summer rain

         16   falls, Lake Winnipeg collects that water, and that

         17   reservoir can be operated to distribute that water

         18   throughout the year and bring balance to the

         19   supply and demand for water.

         20               The control structure at Jenpeg

         21   controls the flow on the west Nelson River,

         22   approximately 85 percent of the flow out of Lake

         23   Winnipeg flows down the west channel.  The other

         24   15 percent of the flow flows uncontrolled through

         25   the east channel directly into Cross Lake.  The




                                                                       86



          1   outflows from Lake Winnipeg are the main

          2   determinant of the Nelson River water levels.  So

          3   Jenpeg is the control point.  What happens at

          4   Jenpeg determines what the water levels will be

          5   downstream.

          6               The Lake Winnipeg Regulation project

          7   is operated under a water power licence issued to

          8   Manitoba Hydro from the Province of Manitoba.

          9   Lake Winnipeg has a four foot range in the licence

         10   that has been reserved for power purpose.  The

         11   licence has an upper level of 715 feet for power,

         12   a lower level of 711 feet.  It is within those

         13   four feet that Manitoba Hydro is allowed to

         14   regulate for power purposes.

         15               The licence specifies how Manitoba

         16   Hydro will operate the control structure at Jenpeg

         17   during flood conditions.  Under high flow

         18   conditions such as occurred in the flood of 1997,

         19   the water level on Lake Winnipeg rose above

         20   elevation 715 feet, and Manitoba Hydro was

         21   required to operate the Jenpeg dam in order to

         22   minimize flooding along, around Lake Winnipeg.

         23               During drought conditions, the level

         24   of Lake Winnipeg can drop below level 711.  Under

         25   those conditions the licence issued by the




                                                                       87



          1   Province requires, transfers authority for the

          2   outflows at Jenpeg to the Minister of Water

          3   Stewardship.  So Manitoba Hydro does not get to

          4   decide independently what the outflows from Lake

          5   Winnipeg will be, either under low flows or under

          6   flood conditions.  However, when the water levels

          7   are within the 4 foot range reserved in the

          8   licence for power, there are two modes of

          9   operation.  The first mode is conservation mode,

         10   when Manitoba Hydro is holding back water in Lake

         11   Winnipeg out of concern that there will be an

         12   adequate energy supply in the future.

         13               This is the condition that we are in

         14   now.  We are in a severe drought.  We are in

         15   conservation mode, concerned that water needs to

         16   be held back to serve the future demand for

         17   electricity.  However, when conditions are more

         18   normal, Manitoba Hydro regulates the outflows from

         19   Lake Winnipeg based upon power system economics,

         20   regulates within the limits that are set through

         21   its agreements and other licences.  This is the

         22   range for which there is potential for Wuskwatim

         23   related seasonal change and outflows from Lake

         24   Winnipeg.  If the surplus power that Wuskwatim is

         25   producing is best stored for future release to the




                                                                       88



          1   market, that energy will be stored in Lake

          2   Winnipeg, and it creates a potential for a change

          3   in water regime as a result of the project.

          4               So what are the major factors that

          5   affect the operation of the Lake Winnipeg project?

          6   A critical factor is the ice conditions that --

          7   the icing that occurs in the winter time, the

          8   choking of the channels that limit Manitoba

          9   Hydro's ability to release water from Lake

         10   Winnipeg and get it to the downstream generating

         11   stations.

         12               Another major critical factor is the

         13   operation of the Churchill River Diversion.  The

         14   Churchill River Diversion has very little storage.

         15   South Indian Lake is a relatively small lake, has

         16   a very limited ability to transfer water.  And

         17   that operation needs to be considered when the

         18   decisions are made to operate Lake Winnipeg

         19   Regulation.

         20               By far the major factor that affects

         21   the regulation of Lake Winnipeg is the water

         22   supply.  Extreme droughts cause low flows, extreme

         23   floods cause high flows.  Those flow conditions

         24   cause low levels and high levels respectively.

         25   Our firm power demands need to be met at all




                                                                       89



          1   times.  Winter power demands are highest.  We need

          2   to hold back water to conserve that for future, if

          3   there is a concern for low water conditions.

          4               Relative power prices are a major

          5   driving factor.  Summer prices are generally

          6   higher than winter prices, and that price

          7   differential affects the release decisions on Lake

          8   Winnipeg during normal flow conditions.

          9               And the interconnection capability,

         10   our ability to move energy to the export markets,

         11   also has a major impact on how the lake is

         12   operated.  The water may be there, but there may

         13   not be any room on the interconnections for the

         14   energy to be taken to market.  So if the

         15   interconnection capability is insufficient, that

         16   will affect the way that Lake Winnipeg Regulation

         17   is operated.

         18               Ice restrictions severely limit the

         19   outflow capability from Lake Winnipeg in the

         20   winter time.  There is an approximate 50 percent

         21   flow reduction caused by ice accumulations and ice

         22   growth in the outlet channels between Lake

         23   Winnipeg and Jenpeg.  During the summer season,

         24   Lake Winnipeg project is completely capable of

         25   meeting the power demands downstream of the large




                                                                       90



          1   Nelson River plants.  In the winter time it is

          2   like clogging of the arteries, the ice chokes up

          3   the river, and Lake Winnipeg is incapable of

          4   supplying an adequate amount of water for the

          5   downstream plants.  What that means is that

          6   Churchill River Diversion water is most useful in

          7   the winter.  The Lake Winnipeg reservoir is

          8   incapable of meeting that demand, so that need for

          9   water at the downstream plants needs to be

         10   augmented by maximum flows on the Churchill River.

         11               This chart shows levels on Southern

         12   Indian Lake for the years 2000 to 2003.  During

         13   the summer outflows from Notigi are reduced so

         14   that the level of Southern Indian Lake rises.  The

         15   levels are brought up, if possible, to the full

         16   supply level of 847 feet.  The purpose of bringing

         17   the waters to the maximum levels is so that a

         18   maximum amount of water is stored and is available

         19   to flow down the diversion route in the winter

         20   time to meet the winter power demand.  So the

         21   Southern Indian Lake reservoir is drawn down

         22   during the winter time over that 4-foot range, so

         23   the maximum amount of water can be concentrated

         24   down the diversion to meet that winter power

         25   demand, because Lake Winnipeg Regulation is




                                                                       91



          1   incapable of fully satisfying the need for water

          2   downstream.

          3               Churchill River Diversion operations

          4   follow this predictable seasonal pattern.  This

          5   seasonal pattern is driven by the ice restrictions

          6   on Lake Winnipeg.  Those ice restrictions will not

          7   change as a result of Wuskwatim project, so that

          8   seasonal pattern will not change as a result.

          9               I mentioned earlier that water supply

         10   is the most significant driver for Lake Winnipeg

         11   Regulation.  If there is very little water flowing

         12   into the Manitoba system, the Manitoba reservoirs,

         13   outflows from the reservoirs need to be held back

         14   to maintain water levels within the reservoir

         15   within their regulated range.  So in extreme

         16   drought conditions, water supply is least, water

         17   flows on the Nelson River are lowest, extreme

         18   drought leads to lowest levels.

         19               In major floods such as occurred

         20   during the 1997 flood of the century, you have the

         21   highest levels.  Lake Winnipeg reaches its highest

         22   level, flows down the Nelson River reached their

         23   highest flows, and water levels will be the

         24   highest.  The range of levels along the Nelson

         25   River between highest levels and lowest level




                                                                       92



          1   caused by variation of the water supply can be

          2   between 8 and 13 feet depending upon the location.

          3   The water flows are not always the lowest, they

          4   are not always the highest, they follow this

          5   irregular pattern.  Water levels on the Nelson

          6   River also follow that pattern.

          7               This chart shows the variation in

          8   monthly power prices in the export markets that

          9   Manitoba Hydro serves.  Power prices are generally

         10   highest in the summertime, especially in the

         11   United States market where there is, their peak

         12   demands occur due to air-conditioning loads, the

         13   most expensive generators have to run at that

         14   time, it drives up the price of power.

         15               During the spring and the fall season

         16   we are not into the heavy air-conditioning period,

         17   we are not into extreme heating loads, so power

         18   prices are at the lowest during the fall.

         19               That price differential throughout the

         20   year is the price signal that Manitoba Hydro

         21   responds to if it has surplus electricity

         22   available to sell into the export market.  If

         23   there is a surplus unit of power available,

         24   Manitoba Hydro wants to store that water in

         25   reservoirs and release it to the market at the




                                                                       93



          1   time when it can get the maximum value.  But that

          2   can only be achieved if there is sufficient

          3   interconnection capability or generating capacity

          4   to allow that energy to be taken to market.  So

          5   Lake Winnipeg can shift surplus energy to higher

          6   value months, but only if it is possible, only if

          7   there is enough transmission available or enough

          8   generators to take that energy to those high

          9   priced markets.

         10               This is the factor that creates the

         11   potential for shifting water under normal

         12   conditions, because Wuskwatim, because of the

         13   Wuskwatim plant.  All of the Wuskwatim output will

         14   not be sold to a customer under a firm contract.

         15   There will be some surplus power that Wuskwatim

         16   produces on average.  So Manitoba Hydro has the

         17   choice of taking that surplus energy to the market

         18   at a time of its choosing, and that time will be

         19   driven by the price that the market, the price

         20   signal that the market is sending to the

         21   operators.

         22               We have been operating the power

         23   system with Lake Winnipeg Regulation and Churchill

         24   River Diversion and large interconnections for

         25   over 25 years.  It gives us experience with how




                                                                       94



          1   the power system was operated in the past.  But

          2   the question is, what will happen in the future if

          3   we build Wuskwatim and now have to operate that?

          4   Lots of things can change between now and the

          5   future that the operators don't know.  At this

          6   point we use our computer models in order to help

          7   us predict the effect of operations from the

          8   Wuskwatim plant.

          9               Our computer modeling system is called

         10   SPLASH, and it is a simulation program that looks

         11   at what the Manitoba load will be in the future,

         12   looks at our export power commitments, looks at

         13   our historical water supply record, looks at our

         14   export market price forecast and our

         15   interconnection capability.  It can look at these

         16   variables and predict how the system will operate

         17   in the future, and then we can add Wuskwatim to

         18   that computer model and see what the effect on

         19   system operation is with and without Wuskwatim.

         20               I want to take you through that

         21   comparison of water levels using Cross Lake as an

         22   example of a place that will see some small

         23   changes in water regime as a result of water

         24   levels, as a result of Wuskwatim.

         25               This chart shows the output from our




                                                                       95



          1   SPLASH computer model for the water years 1970

          2   through 1990.  It shows the water levels on Cross

          3   Lake for the load year 2012.  This is the output

          4   of the model without Wuskwatim as part of the

          5   supply and without the export sales associated

          6   with the Wuskwatim project.  1974, very high water

          7   year, the model predicts very high water levels on

          8   Cross Lake as a result of the 1974 flood, very low

          9   levels during the drought from 1977, very low

         10   levels during the droughts of the early '80's, and

         11   again very low levels during the droughts of the

         12   late '80's and early '90's.  Water levels

         13   fluctuate as the water supply fluctuates.

         14               The next slide shows, if we add

         15   Wuskwatim to the generating system and we sell the

         16   firm production from Wuskwatim in the export

         17   market, how the model predicts the water levels on

         18   Cross Lake will be under those conditions.  Under

         19   very high flow conditions as in 1974 level, there

         20   is very little change; under low levels, very

         21   little change.  There are some minor changes

         22   during the mid band, mid range of levels, because

         23   Wuskwatim is providing more power to the system

         24   than is associated with the export sale, and our

         25   computer model identifies that that water should




                                                                       96



          1   be held back in reservoir storage and should be

          2   shifted to a different time.  So there are slight

          3   changes in water levels as a result of Wuskwatim

          4   and associated firm sale as compared to the

          5   without Wuskwatim analysis.

          6               That chart was a chronological look at

          7   the water levels on Cross Lake.  One way of

          8   viewing that same information is to construct a

          9   duration curve of water levels, where we sort the

         10   water levels from lowest flows to highest flows,

         11   they are ranked from lowest to highest.  And we

         12   have done this for the summer levels for the

         13   period of, for that same period of historical

         14   records, again for the load year 2012.  The red

         15   line indicates the levels without Wuskwatim, and

         16   the black line indicates what the duration curve

         17   will look like with the construction of, operation

         18   of Wuskwatim and associating export sale.

         19               Small changes in levels are predicted

         20   by the model.  The average level change will be,

         21   during the summer will be .04 feet, less than half

         22   an inch change in average water level, slight

         23   lowering of the level during the summertime.  The

         24   maximum water level change was .12 feet, just

         25   over, between 1 and 2 inches.  And those changes




                                                                       97



          1   are in the context of a water level change over

          2   the range of all flows of around 6 and a half

          3   feet.

          4               That is our -- that was our base case

          5   assumption, that we build the project, we match it

          6   with an export sale.  As a sensitivity, we said

          7   what happens if you don't enter into a firm sale

          8   associated with the firm output or dependable

          9   output from the system that results from

         10   Wuskwatim?  This analysis again for the same

         11   period, for the same load year, shows that --

         12   without Wuskwatim the water levels are shown in

         13   the red line, with Wuskwatim the water levels are

         14   shown slightly higher during, in the normal range

         15   from something near lower quartile to upper decile

         16   flows.  That is because the Lake Winnipeg

         17   Regulation project is concentrating the surplus

         18   production in Lake Winnipeg and Lake Winnipeg is

         19   releasing that surplus energy to the market during

         20   the summer season when power prices are highest.

         21   That results in slightly higher outflows from Lake

         22   Winnipeg during the summer season, resulting in

         23   slightly higher levels with Wuskwatim than

         24   without.  Conversely, in the winter time, levels

         25   would be slightly lower in the normal range than




                                                                       98



          1   the without Wuskwatim case.  But, again, this is a

          2   sensitivity, this is assuming that Manitoba Hydro

          3   doesn't enter into a firm power sale and all of

          4   this energy that Wuskwatim is producing is surplus

          5   and can be concentrated according to the price

          6   signal that the market is sending to Manitoba

          7   Hydro.

          8               Those are very small changes.  To put

          9   those level changes in context, I have shown a

         10   chart here that shows maximum water level

         11   variations that occur on Cross Lake now, water

         12   supply results in a range of levels around 8 feet,

         13   wave action on Cross Lake is approximately 4 feet

         14   under maximum conditions.  With constant flows out

         15   of Lake Winnipeg in the winter time, water levels

         16   on Cross Lake vary about three-quarters of a foot

         17   just due to the ice effects caused by the thermal

         18   change between a warm day and a cold day on the

         19   lake.  So water variations occur naturally up to

         20   three-quarters of a foot.  Wind setup on the lake

         21   is half a foot.  Operation of the Jenpeg

         22   Generating Station through its daily cycle is

         23   around .2 feet, about 3 inches between day and

         24   night.  In that context, the water level changes

         25   resulting from Wuskwatim under the maximum were




                                                                       99



          1   shown, with the firm sale, was the reduction in

          2   the summer of about .1 feet, about an inch

          3   reduction, and as a sensitivity we have shown an

          4   increase of about .4 feet, about 5 inches, if we

          5   do not enter into a firm sale.

          6               Cross Lake isn't the only lake that

          7   will be affected by the change in system

          8   operations as a result of adding Wuskwatim to the

          9   generation fleet.  Water level changes will occur

         10   on other lakes in the system, Lake Winnipeg, Cedar

         11   Lake, Kiskittogisu Lake, Sipiwesk Lake, Split Lake

         12   and Stephens Lake, but our studies have indicated

         13   that these water level changes will be even

         14   smaller than those, than what we are predicting on

         15   Cross Lake.

         16               We looked at the cumulative effects on

         17   water regime should Manitoba Hydro construct

         18   Notigi, Gull and/or Conawapa in conjunction with

         19   Wuskwatim.  We considered the possible future

         20   generating stations in the system.  We came to the

         21   conclusion that there will be no changes to the

         22   Churchill River Diversion operation beyond the

         23   study area as a result of these projects.

         24               We concluded that there would be no

         25   perceptible change to Lake Winnipeg Regulation




                                                                      100



          1   resulting from the construction of Notigi

          2   Generating Station at the Notigi control

          3   structure.  We concluded that changes to Lake

          4   Winnipeg Regulation were very dependent upon the

          5   assumptions surrounding the construction of Gull

          6   and Conawapa.  Particularly those projects and the

          7   assumptions surrounding those projects affect the

          8   direction and the magnitude of change in water

          9   levels; that interconnection size and how well the

         10   production from the these new plants matches the

         11   export sale are critical assumptions; other

         12   factors can also be significant; and that no one

         13   scenario is likely today.

         14               So, in conclusion, there will be no

         15   change to CRD operation or water regime beyond the

         16   study area as a result of Wuskwatim.  There will

         17   be no perceptible change in Lower Nelson water

         18   levels.  There will be no perceptible change in

         19   Lake Winnipeg outflows, no perceptible change in

         20   water levels affected by Lake Winnipeg Regulation.

         21   And we provided these results to the EIS team for

         22   their review.

         23               That concludes my presentation.

         24               MR. WOJCZYNSKI:  Mr. Chairman, that

         25   concludes the system operation presentation.  The




                                                                      101



          1   next one we would make is for need for

          2   alternatives, but I would expect that presentation

          3   is close to an hour and a half, so you may prefer

          4   to have us break and conclude later, but we are at

          5   your disposal.

          6               THE CHAIRMAN:  I think that is a wise

          7   suggestion.  Maybe we could break at this time and

          8   come back and hear the full presentation on that,

          9   at 1:00 o'clock sharp.

         10   

         11               (HEARING RECESSED AT 11:45 A.M. AND

         12               RECONVENED AT 1:00 P.M.)

         13   

         14          (PROCEEDINGS RECONVENED AT 1:03 P.M.)

         15   

         16          THE CHAIRMAN:  I turn the ball over to you, Mr. 

         17   Wojczynski.  

         18          MR. WOJCZYNSKI:  Thank you, Mr. Chair.  So this 

         19   afternoon, we'd like to bring you the Need For an 

         20   Alternatives presentation and I will be leading off 

         21   with an explanation of the overall justification for 

         22   Wuskwatim for the background and the context for our 

         23   evaluations, a discussion of the alternative resources 

         24   and a description of the economic evaluations and the 

         25   results.  Lynn Wray, Division Manager of Treasury and 




                                                                      102



          1   Business Analysis will follow me and deal with the 

          2   financial evaluations of the projects.  

          3          I'd like to start with our interpretation of 

          4   the scope of the review for the need for an 

          5   alternatives portion, both of our submission and for 

          6   the hearings and the whole IRR process and everything 

          7   that we did.  And we took our interpretation from the 

          8   terms of reference given to the CEC in its original 

          9   terms of reference from the Minister.  And we've got 

         10   some excerpts here to explain what our interpretation 

         11   is.  And we give it in two aspects.  And so we've used 

         12   excerpts to help explain that.  

         13          The first excerpt is that all alternative 

         14   options are considered.  Wuskwatim was selected on 

         15   reasonable grounds including economic viability as an 

         16   export project and relevant technical factors.  And 

         17   then a little bit further in terms of reference, it 

         18   discusses Wuskwatim in its entirety.  

         19          And so this first part we take to be what 

         20   should be the evaluation of the project considering 

         21   the economics, environmental risk and other factors.  

         22   It is obvious from an environmental licensing 

         23   acceptability point of view that one should consider 

         24   the entire project and not portions of the project and 

         25   that the ownership arrangements and who owns what is 




                                                                      103



          1   not significant from an environment acceptability 

          2   point of view.  Thus the economic evaluations and the 

          3   options screening did not separate the project into 

          4   Manitoba Hydro and NCN portions. 

          5          The second part of the scope is captured by 

          6   this second portion from the terms of reference and it 

          7   is that the effect on Manitoba Hydro customer rates 

          8   and Manitoba Hydro financial stability should be 

          9   considered.  And particularly, there's the phrase that 

         10   NCN/Manitoba Hydro partnership to be described to the 

         11   degree required to understand the financial analysis. 

         12          So based on this, our second part of the Need 

         13   For an Alternative is that we have an evaluation of 

         14   the effect on Manitoba Hydro rates and financial 

         15   situation.  This protects the Manitoba customers and 

         16   the rate payers, thus the financial evaluation 

         17   considers only the investment and returns associated 

         18   with the Manitoba Hydro ownership in the project. 

         19          So that's the sort of the terms of reference 

         20   that we utilized generally.  There were other aspects 

         21   as well in our submission and in our whole process  on 

         22   the need and alternative side.  

         23          Now I'd like to turn to the presentation 

         24   itself.  And in a nutshell, what is the justification 

         25   for proceeding with Wuskwatim particularly in 2010.  




                                                                      104



          1   And in one sentence, it is that Wuskwatim is a 

          2   profitable project with benefits for all Manitobans 

          3   including those in Northern Manitoba and a very clean 

          4   project with much less environmental impact than the 

          5   generation it displaces.  So in a nutshell, that is 

          6   our justification for Wuskwatim.  

          7          But what we do in this slide then is try and 

          8   expand on that and summarize in this one slide we're 

          9   going to expand on that short justification and also 

         10   summarize our whole need for an alternatives 

         11   submission. 

         12          We start off with the Need For portion of our 

         13   analysis and it deals with the fact that there's 

         14   economic, financial, environmental and reliability 

         15   benefits from increased electricity exports that will 

         16   be enabled by Wuskwatim.  And we will, in some detail, 

         17   go through that in the remainder of our Need For 

         18   Alternatives presentation. 

         19          In terms of the environment, Wuskwatim is an 

         20   exceptional gem of a project.  Wuskwatim is an 

         21   environmentally clean project that provides renewable 

         22   energy, has a low impact design and operation, and you 

         23   heard some of that earlier this morning.  We have a 

         24   partnership with NCN that assisted in having a good 

         25   healthy design for the project and in ensuring that 




                                                                      105



          1   there will be local benefits.  It would be hard to 

          2   find other projects, other power resource projects as 

          3   environmentally attractive as Wuskwatim.  

          4          Wuskwatim's environmental attractiveness is 

          5   demonstrated through the Comprehensive Environmental 

          6   Impact Statement material that we've submitted earlier 

          7   and that we will present later on today in the second 

          8   presentation in the afternoon. 

          9          The third aspect on the Need For An Alternative 

         10   is risks.  Any investment that anyone makes has risk 

         11   of some sort attached to it and of course Wuskwatim is 

         12   no exception.  We have done an extensive assessment of 

         13   the risks and we have concluded that Wuskwatim, all of 

         14   its risks are relatively low.  And it is overall a 

         15   relatively low-risk project and all the risks that may 

         16   occur are manageable. 

         17          Moving onto the next factor.  The next factor 

         18   is more of a byproduct of Wuskwatim.  It is not a 

         19   primary drive, it's not why we are doing Wuskwatim but 

         20   it is a very important factor.  And that is that 

         21   Wuskwatim will provide an economic stimulus in 

         22   Manitoba and it will provide benefits for Manitoba and 

         23   all Manitobans.  And we will explain that in some more 

         24   detail later on as well.  

         25          Secondly, what is the justification dealing 




                                                                      106



          1   with alternatives to Wuskwatim?  We, at Manitoba 

          2   Hydro, on an ongoing regular basis assess the full 

          3   range of resource options and stay on top of what the 

          4   new technologies are and continually update our 

          5   analysis.  And we have, in our planning studies and 

          6   our decision-making in the corporation, come up with a 

          7   resource plan that we are working with and that we are 

          8   committed to.  We are planning to continue to expand 

          9   our PowerSmart energy conservation, or demand-side 

         10   management is another term, program.             We've 

         11   been very active in it in the past.  We are already 

         12   planning to expand it.  We are looking to expanding it 

         13   further.  And we're planning to undertake any economic 

         14   wind generation in Manitoba.  And that's in addition 

         15   to improving our existing system.  So those are 

         16   already fundamentals of what we are doing.  And then 

         17   in addition of course, we're now looking at Wuskwatim. 

         18          Looking at the other options Hydro, gas or 

         19   coal, we have determined that at this time at least, 

         20   Wuskwatim is a more attractive option than any of the 

         21   other generation options. 

         22          So that in a nutshell is the Need For an 

         23   Alternative justification for Wuskwatim.  I'd like to 

         24   now move on to expanding on those points. 

         25          The first is that a fundamental drive for 




                                                                      107



          1   Wuskwatim is that advancing Wuskwatim will enable 

          2   Manitoba Hydro to increase exports particularly in the 

          3   earlier years.  Exports are profitable for Manitoba 

          4   Hydro.  They have been one of the major reasons why 

          5   our customer rates are the lowest in the developed 

          6   world, amongst the lowest in the developed world.  But 

          7   exports also of hydroelectricity contribute to 

          8   reducing global greenhouse gas emissions and also 

          9   other emissions as well.  And this is done by it 

         10   displacing coal or gas generation in the markets that 

         11   we export into. 

         12          Proceeding with Wuskwatim and the other 

         13   resources we are pursuing such as the DSM and the wind 

         14   energy and the supply efficiency improvements will 

         15   enable Manitoba Hydro to continue exporting and to 

         16   accrue the kind of benefits I was just referring to. 

         17          Advancing Wuskwatim will also enhance our 

         18   reliability of supply to Manitobans.  Should we run 

         19   into generation or transmission supply problems or 

         20   should the Manitoba load drill faster than we're 

         21   currently forecasting, even though it is planned to 

         22   commit additional export contracts, should problems 

         23   occur in Manitoba with Wuskwatim, there will be a 

         24   greater amount of supply that we can hold back in 

         25   Manitoba while alternate supplies are being arranged 




                                                                      108



          1   in other jurisdictions.  And this may seem somewhat 

          2   contrary to the people.  We're saying, well, you're 

          3   going to advance Wuskwatim, get export revenue, so how 

          4   can that be any good for Manitobans if we run into 

          5   trouble?  

          6          What we would do is in an emergency, we will 

          7   hold back the power in Manitoba and we'd find and have 

          8   to somehow arrange for and pay for alternate supplies 

          9   on the other side of the border and the other side of 

         10   the interconnection.  So that will be of a benefit to 

         11   Manitobans from a reliability point of view.  Overall, 

         12   Manitobans are better off by advancing Wuskwatim and 

         13   maintaining our exports. 

         14          As I mentioned earlier, any investment has risk 

         15   and we had extensive efforts to ensure that the risks 

         16   are minimized at Wuskwatim and that we have a good 

         17   handle on what the remaining risks are.  

         18          The two main categories of risk that one would 

         19   look at with a project like Wuskwatim would be what is 

         20   the chance of the capital costs going higher than we 

         21   estimate them to be; and secondly, what if our export 

         22   rates are lower?  Well, we have had extensive 

         23   experience building Hydro plants, planning Hydro 

         24   plants and we have had extensive experience marketing 

         25   export energy.  So we have some fundamental good 




                                                                      109



          1   reasons to believe that we, as an organization, are 

          2   capable of proceeding with Wuskwatim and staying 

          3   within the kind of parameters we are looking at.  

          4          We have had an extensive engineering and 

          5   environmental studies over a number of years, field 

          6   investigations and we now have a wealth of information 

          7   on Wuskwatim.  We have a very advanced design and set 

          8   of information on Wuskwatim that gives us great 

          9   comfort in the project. 

         10          There are numerous other factors that could be 

         11   looked at and we will review the sensitivity analyses 

         12   shortly in our economic evaluation portion of the 

         13   presentation.  But our conclusion, at looking at 

         14   those, again is that we've got a relatively low risk 

         15   project.  All the risks are manageable and the 

         16   Wuskwatim economic benefits are very robust with 

         17   respect to the risk factors. 

         18          Moving onto that economic stimulus that I have 

         19   referred to as a byproduct, remembering that the 

         20   primary economic drive for Manitobans is that will 

         21   provide profits.  However, it will also provide an 

         22   economic stimulus for Manitobans and provide 

         23   socio-economic benefits.  There will be training, 

         24   jobs, business opportunities in Manitoba and Canada.  

         25   And we have, particularly on this project, although we 




                                                                      110



          1   have made efforts on previous projects as well but 

          2   we've made an even more innovative and greater effort 

          3   with Wuskwatim have a special focus on Aboriginal 

          4   people in Northern Manitoba.  We've got a pre-project 

          5   training program that Mr. Adams spoke to this morning.  

          6   There will be a number of special initiatives to job 

          7   preference and special measures to enhance Aboriginal 

          8   employment and there will be business opportunities.  

          9   And generally, this is for Aboriginal people in 

         10   Northern Manitoba.  NCN, there's a special emphasis 

         11   being in the vicinity.  This is also true for all 

         12   Aboriginal people in Northern Manitoba. 

         13          So there will be a more direct Aboriginal 

         14   participation in the project and during benefits 

         15   through the partnership with NCN and there will be 

         16   significant social net benefits to the economy as a 

         17   whole.  As I will discuss later, we have had an 

         18   analysis undertaking to determine not just from the 

         19   project proponents point of view, what does the 

         20   project look like, but we had a special analysis 

         21   looking at it from the provincial society point of 

         22   view.  And they indicated that the social return to 

         23   Manitobans significantly exceeds even the financial 

         24   returns to Manitoba Hydro and NCN.  

         25          So I'm just going to speak briefly about some 




                                                                      111



          1   of the options that we're looking at.  I'll go into 

          2   more detail on the options later on in the resource 

          3   screening part of the presentation.  But it's 

          4   important to emphasize that Manitoba Hydro considers a 

          5   full range of resource alternatives and we are 

          6   committed to pursuing those that are economic and 

          7   viable and attractive. 

          8          First of all, Manitoba Hydro for over ten 

          9   years, has been active in the demand-side management 

         10   or PowerSmart area.  We have a target for the year 

         11   2011 and 12 of having undertaken 356 megawatts of DSM 

         12   by that time.  That's in our plans right now, in our 

         13   integrated plans for forecast.  And that includes DSM 

         14   that was undertaken in the past, DSM that we are 

         15   currently working on and engaged in with our end-use 

         16   customers.  DSM we're planning to undertake between 

         17   now and 2011.  When you think of Wuskwatim being 200 

         18   megawatts, a 356 megawatts entire DSM program is 

         19   significant. 

         20          Most of you are aware that a few years ago, 

         21   concurrent with us looking at, in more detail, 

         22   Wuskwatim, we initiated a major review and study of 

         23   the potential in Manitoba.  It's necessary every 

         24   number of years to update that.  So we initiated that 

         25   a few years ago.  That culminated in the study that 




                                                                      112



          1   came out last summer, end of last summer, and has been 

          2   part of this review process.  It suggests that there's 

          3   potential for us to expand our DSM even beyond the 356 

          4   megawatts we talked about.  And we are in the process 

          5   and will be in the process of incorporating that into 

          6   our planning process with the expectation we will 

          7   likely increase our ultimate DSM target beyond the 

          8   356. 

          9          In addition to looking at customer end-use 

         10   efficiency, we also look at the efficiency of our 

         11   existing system.  As Dave Cormie explained this 

         12   morning, we have in the order of 5,000 megawatts of 

         13   generation in our system, we have a large transmission 

         14   system.  And what we have been doing particularly 

         15   since export rates increased a number of years ago, we 

         16   have been assessing all the opportunities to improve 

         17   the efficiency of the facilities we already have and 

         18   also to expand the capability.  In certain cases, same 

         19   facility, same amount of water, you can get more water 

         20   out.  So we're trying to do that.  We have an 

         21   extensive program for doing that and that target, or 

         22   it's not so much a target as our estimate of what we 

         23   will achieve by 2011 is 382 megawatts.  And again, 

         24   like the DSM, that's programs we have done in the 

         25   past, are doing today or have committed in the next 




                                                                      113



          1   number of years. 

          2          The other area that we are actively pursuing 

          3   and have a commitment to is dealing with alternative 

          4   energy.  We have right now in our plans and as part of 

          5   our financial forecast that we would be undertaking 

          6   250 megawatts of wind generation in Manitoba.  It 

          7   could be either on the basis of an independent power 

          8   producer who would sell to Manitoba Hydro under 

          9   contract and then we'd export the power using the rest 

         10   of our system to enhance the value of that wind power.  

         11   Or we could develop it ourselves at Manitoba Hydro 

         12   some sort of combination.  We have an extensive 

         13   program of assessing wind in Manitoba.  We've had 

         14   seven monitoring stations up for nearly a year.  There 

         15   are a number of other activities and we are assessing 

         16   the possibility of wind ourselves.  

         17          So we have quite a wide range of options where 

         18   we'd be looking at, if you look at site management, 

         19   supply efficiency improvements, alternate energy and 

         20   new hydro, those are four legs of a diverse portfolio 

         21   of economically and environmentally attractive 

         22   options.  

         23          Now, we do look at other generation options and 

         24   resource options than the ones I just mentioned.  We 

         25   don't just consider Hydro, wind, DSM, alternate 




                                                                      114



          1   energy.  In the past, we have built coal plants.  We 

          2   have a remaining 105 megawatt unit at Brandon.  Two 

          3   years ago, we built nearly a gas combustion turbine 

          4   plant using natural gas almost 300 megawatts.          

          5         However, overall, when considering the 

          6   economics, rate impacts, the environment and other 

          7   factors, proceeding with Wuskwatim now is more 

          8   attractive than other forms of new generation such as 

          9   Hydro, gas or coal.  However, this does not preclude 

         10   the possibility of future development of these Hydro 

         11   or these other generation matters. 

         12          We did find Wuskwatim more attractive than 

         13   thermal generation.  But it would be possible for us 

         14   to, in the future, conclude that more thermal would be 

         15   attractive but that isn't really in our studies at 

         16   this time. 

         17          I should mention that those options, 

         18   particularly the Hydro options that were not precluded 

         19   from developing those other ones at a later date, for 

         20   instance, the three Hydro options, the other ones 

         21   we're looking at, Gull, Conawapa, Notigi are 

         22   attractive options.  And even some of the other 

         23   options might be attractive in the future as our load 

         24   grows and the possibility of expansions to our export 

         25   interconnections occur, then there will be 




                                                                      115



          1   opportunities to develop the other ones and that 

          2   wouldn't be precluded.  

          3          I'd like to now turn to the more detailed 

          4   evaluation of resources.  In evaluating Wuskwatim or 

          5   other alternatives, whether it's wind or DSM or 

          6   whatever, an important context to start with is the 

          7   load growth in Manitoba.  Now, as Dave indicated, we 

          8   first end up meeting our load in the province and then 

          9   we export what's left.  And so as our load grows in 

         10   Manitoba, the amount of energy we can export, the 

         11   amount of surplus available to export diminishes.      

         12         And this graph, it's kind of a boring graph I 

         13   admit.  It's got 2006 to 2038 and we've got the 

         14   energy.  We've got this in annual energy.  And these 

         15   units are hard to follow after a while.  It's 

         16   thousands of gigawatt hours.  So like this is 21,000 

         17   gigawatt hours which is 21 million megawatt hours.     

         18         And so I apologize, there's no other way for us 

         19   to explain the energy.  The difference between the 

         20   indices on the axis is 4,000 gigawatt hours.  And it's 

         21   kind of hard to relate to but if you think of 

         22   Wuskwatim as providing 1,250 gigawatt hours of 

         23   dependable energy, then you can think of Wuskwatim as 

         24   sort of being something like a third of the distance 

         25   between these two sets of lines.  




                                                                      116



          1          That's what our load growth looks like.  It's 

          2   fairly flat into the future.  There will be ups and 

          3   downs.  We can't predict exact ups and downs.  We've 

          4   got an average.  And it's a slight flattening into the 

          5   future.  But it is a very boring line.

          6          What is more interesting is what has the load 

          7   growth in the past been, the historical load growth?  

          8   And one of the reasons I'm bringing this up today is 

          9   that one of the participants, one of our esteem 

         10   participants in this process, TREE/RCM, their 

         11   consultants have expressed concern about our load 

         12   forecasting and the adequacy of that.  This is just to 

         13   give a very basic first-cut indicator of what happens 

         14   with our load forecasting.  

         15          And what we have, this is the number of years 

         16   1960 going into the future up, this is the end of the 

         17   historical period 2003.  And you can see, this is the 

         18   percentage load growth from one year to the next.  So 

         19   we actually had two years where there was a slight dip 

         20   in the load growth but in the earlier years there was 

         21   some huge increases in load growth but that has 

         22   significantly tapered off for a whole bunch of good 

         23   reasons.  And it's more or less been up and down but 

         24   more stable in recent years.  And the average load 

         25   growth historically over that time period is about 4 




                                                                      117



          1   and a half per cent.  

          2          Now, we don't just go and extrapolate from the 

          3   past, we do a sophisticated analysis dealing with 

          4   end-use and all the various sectors and we look 

          5   forward into the future.  And you can see this here is 

          6   our forecast and the average load growth into the 

          7   future in our forecast is, and this is for the 2003 

          8   forecast, is 1.1 per cent into the future.  

          9   Substantially lower than the historical rate.  

         10          So moving on, we have to do our planning not 

         11   just to meet Manitoba load but any firm export 

         12   contracts we have.  So we enter into the long-term 

         13   contracts with export customers and typically three, 

         14   four, five, 10, 15, sometimes 20 years.  So what we 

         15   have here now as well is on top of the domestic load 

         16   is our firm export contracts.  And the single largest 

         17   one we have in there is a 500 megawatt, 10 year sale 

         18   to Northern States power that we signed a couple of 

         19   years ago.  It is now an approved contract.  We have 

         20   other ones as well in here.  We are in the process of 

         21   negotiating other contracts but they are not in here.  

         22   We only have the ones that are currently committed and 

         23   approved.  And you can see into the future there's 

         24   very little export that are committed beyond around 

         25   2017 or so.  So into the future, the only commitments 




                                                                      118



          1   we have to meet are our domestic load. 

          2          This graph brings together the other half of 

          3   the picture and that is the supply side.  So what we 

          4   have here in the yellow is the firm resources 

          5   available to Manitoba, the firm Electrocity Resources.  

          6   It's composed of our existing hydro and this is under 

          7   drought conditions.  Dependable energy is what we can 

          8   do in a drought.  So it consists of the dependable 

          9   hydro, the thermal generation we can run in the 

         10   province, both coal and gas, running them base load 

         11   through the whole year, imports over our tie lines.  

         12   And in a bad drought, we would start maxing out on 

         13   those.  We'd first cancel exports and then we would 

         14   arrange for imports.  Very costly ones eventually.  

         15   And also DSM is built into our resource line.  

         16          So you can see that there is a somewhat steady 

         17   amount of resources and then it diminishes over time.  

         18   I'd just like to point out that in the earlier years 

         19   here, let's say in 2006, there's a substantial 

         20   surplus, less than there is today, but there's a 

         21   substantial surplus there and the majority of it is 

         22   taken up by these long-term firm export contracts and 

         23   we have some surplus left over that we can sell either 

         24   into the long-term or the short-term market.          

         25   And you can see that the resources over time decline 




                                                                      119



          1   around 1016/18, around there.  The majority of the 

          2   reasons for the decline is that we assume  that our 

          3   coal units will retire.  They will be like in the 

          4   order of 50, 60 years old.  Our natural gas units will 

          5   come to the end of their normal life.  And also we 

          6   have import arrangements.  Some of them tied to our 

          7   export contracts that will be assumed to end.         

          8   We do assume though that some import arrangements 

          9   continue after this point.  So this line over here 

         10   does include about 1,600 gigawatt hours of energy 

         11   imports in the off peak over our tie lines.           

         12   So our supply increases over time.  And around 2020, 

         13   the exact year is not critical, we find that the 

         14   demand exceeds the dependable supply and new resources 

         15   would be required.  And our previous analyses had 

         16   concluded that for the 2020 time frame, that the best 

         17   resource we could put in at that time would be 

         18   Wuskwatim and our corporate integrated financial 

         19   forecasts and all our other resource plans have been 

         20   based on that resource plan.  

         21          So this graph shows it's the same graph with 

         22   adding in Wuskwatim, this is the 1,250 gigawatt hours 

         23   of Wuskwatim I was referring to.  And coming in at 

         24   2010.  You can see in the earlier years, Wuskwatim is 

         25   available for exports and then after 2020-ish, it's 




                                                                      120



          1   available for domestic supply.  If we have a drought, 

          2   we can use it for domestic supply.  

          3          The overall conclusion that can be drawn from 

          4   this demand resource picture is that even after the 

          5   economic levels of demand-side management, supply side 

          6   efficiency improvements and wind are taken into 

          7   account.  First of all, new resources are required 

          8   around 2020 for Manitoba load.  Secondly, with exports 

          9   diminishing over time without Wuskwatim, there will be 

         10   ample room for Wuskwatim to be exported over the tie 

         11   lines into either the United States, Ontario or 

         12   Saskatchewan and into those markets.  There are sort 

         13   of the two main messages one can take.  That's sort of 

         14   the two main messages one can take from this series of 

         15   graphs. 

         16          The next part of the picture, the fundamental 

         17   piece that we need to look at when considering 

         18   Wuskwatim and evaluating Wuskwatim and other resources 

         19   is the export price.  We are confident that we are 

         20   going to be able to export.  Let's say we do develop 

         21   Wuskwatim, we are confident we are going to be able to 

         22   export Wuskwatim.  But the real issue is when you 

         23   export, what price are you going to get? 

         24          So this graph shows their prices historically 

         25   from 1990 to 2004 and it shows it in Canadian cents 




                                                                      121



          1   per kilowatt hours, 0, 3, 6, 9, 12.  And you can see a 

          2   definite trend here.  And it's not just our market, 

          3   it's other markets as well, that export prices have 

          4   been on the increase.  There are always a number of 

          5   reasons for things to happen.  But probably the single 

          6   most critical factor is that in the United States, 

          7   that market had open access transmission instituted 

          8   back in 1996.  This is part of the deregulation of the 

          9   electricity markets down in the States.  And what that 

         10   meant was that suppliers such as ourselves were able 

         11   to access a broader market and to have greater 

         12   certainty of getting into that market, had increased 

         13   competition and caused the market price to increase.  

         14   And you can see that once it was open up, there was a 

         15   steady increase and it has held steady since then.  

         16   There is a general consensus in the industry that 

         17   electricity market prices will continue to be high, 

         18   that they won't go back to where they were in say the 

         19   eighties or the early nineties and that we will see a 

         20   sustained high price and that there will be a real 

         21   escalation over time. 

         22          Now, there will be ups and downs.  There's 

         23   absolutely no question of that.  Electricity markets, 

         24   just like any commodity market, has ups and downs and 

         25   variability in it.  But the fundamentals are quite 




                                                                      122



          1   strong and so we have a forecast into the future.  And 

          2   again, it could be ups and downs, it could be higher 

          3   or lower than the kinds of things we're looking at but 

          4   sort of an average.  And what we have projected here 

          5   into the future is a low export price forecast and a 

          6   high export price forecast.  And what these try and do 

          7   is give us these sort of 90, 95 per cent probability 

          8   range of where we expect on the average future 

          9   electricity prices are going to be. 

         10          Now, I should explain we've got a low and high 

         11   and you might ask where is the expected?  We have 

         12   other forecasts that are expected forecasts and we 

         13   can't share those because of commercial 

         14   confidentiality.  We'd be exposed to loss on the 

         15   export market if that were done.  But what we have 

         16   shared is extensive information on those expected 

         17   forecast prices and we have shared all the information 

         18   on the low and the high and all the calculations.  And 

         19   these low and high bound what we expect will happen so 

         20   we can present all our analyses and we feel that is 

         21   more than adequate information.          I'm going to 

         22   particularly focus on the low  because even under the 

         23   low, we've still got a good project.  The high of 

         24   course is even better.  And we think that high is as 

         25   equally likely as low but I will focus on the low. 




                                                                      123



          1          In the low, what we did fundamentally to come 

          2   up with this is there's two components one can think 

          3   of in the export price.  There is the long-term 

          4   contracts that are firm that we have to supply whether 

          5   we have a drought or not and then there is the 

          6   short-term opportunity exports that we supply and 

          7   arrange on a short-term notice if we have a sufficient 

          8   supply.  And we have a mixture of those.  And that 

          9   mixture was an historical price as well.  And in the 

         10   long-term low export one, the starting point of it, 

         11   and actually the whole forecast for the long-term 

         12   firm, we used the prices that we have experienced 

         13   recently but equal to a little bit lower than the 

         14   prices we have experienced recently with no real 

         15   escalation in the future.  

         16          The short term, the other component, we have 

         17   taken what we've experienced recently and added a 

         18   relatively low escalation to the long term.  And the 

         19   escalation we've used in the low scenario is lower 

         20   than what the general consensus is there will be 

         21   escalation.  So that's the sort of basis for the low 

         22   export price forecast. 

         23          Manitoba Hydro utilizes its own direct 

         24   experience in the market, knowledge of market trends 

         25   and independent consulting experts to prepare these 




                                                                      124



          1   forecasts particularly of the expected future 

          2   forecasts.  

          3          The conclusion here is that while earlier we 

          4   were demonstrating there will be room on the 

          5   transmission interconnections to export Wuskwatim, 

          6   these are the range of prices we expect to obtain for 

          7   Wuskwatim and other resources. 

          8          I'd like to give some idea of how we develop 

          9   this expected forecast.  And I should add by the way 

         10   that most of this information we're presenting here 

         11   comes directly out of the submission or the 

         12   interrogatories.  So this is pretty well information 

         13   we have shared before. 

         14          So no one knows with certainty what the exact 

         15   future price is going to be for electricity exports or 

         16   for any commodity.  Our expected price forecast is 

         17   composed actually of a probabilistic weighing of a 

         18   number of scenarios.  Each scenario has a different 

         19   level of environmental regulation of thermal 

         20   generation, thermal generation being the main 

         21   generation which Hydro exports we displace in our 

         22   neighbouring markets.  

         23          So when we're exporting, we displace thermal 

         24   generation.  Effectively what we get when we export is 

         25   the price is that our competitor would have to pay for 




                                                                      125



          1   their generation.  So that's how we can relate our 

          2   exports to the thermal generation prices.  

          3          One of the most likely generation supplies to 

          4   be displaced in the export market are combined cycle 

          5   or combustion turbines that utilize natural gas.  So 

          6   this is a graph of how the cost of energy from a 

          7   combined cycle turbine would vary with the different 

          8   environmental scenarios that we looked at.  It's going 

          9   from 2010 to 40 and then we've got the premiums here 

         10   in cents per kilowatt hour.  

         11          How we develop this is we start with let's say 

         12   a combined cycle gas turbine and we start with what we 

         13   call The Business As Usual environmental scenario.  

         14   There are regulations today in Canada and the United 

         15   States on any thermal generation and there are pricing 

         16   or a costing for the generation.  We look at what is 

         17   in place today and what have Canadian governments, 

         18   U.S. governments already committed to putting in place 

         19   down the road for environmental regulation.  We call 

         20   that business as usual.  And then we develop what the 

         21   cost of that gas turbine energy would be into the 

         22   future and we call that the reference case.  Then we 

         23   add to that what other environmental regulation would 

         24   be put in place.  

         25          There's a general expectation that the 




                                                                      126



          1   regulation of thermal emissions will increase over 

          2   time.  That's pretty well across the line.  I think 

          3   there's a broad consensus that's what's going to 

          4   happen.  That's true whether you're talking about 

          5   mercury emissions being into the air, particulates 

          6   meaning like dust, sulfur dioxide, nitrous oxides 

          7   which are acid rain precursors or ozone, other heavy 

          8   metals.  The full range of them.  There are already 

          9   regulations.  There are going to be more increasingly 

         10   stringent ones.            

         11          The one that's most pertinent in this area is 

         12   greenhouse gases.  Particularly in the United States 

         13   right now, there's no regulation on greenhouse gases.  

         14   There is a general expectation in the future there 

         15   will be.  No one knows when will these regulations 

         16   come in, when will the entire spectrum of regulation 

         17   become more stringent.  How stringent will they 

         18   ultimately be?  

         19          So what we did is develop a number of scenarios 

         20   and analyzed our exports forecasts and our system 

         21   exports and the attractiveness of projects using each 

         22   of the scenarios and then average them together to 

         23   come up with what we call an expected forecast.  And 

         24   we do that with a probabilistic rating.  Lower 

         25   probability in the earlier years, greater probability 




                                                                      127



          1   in the later years.  

          2          One comment I'll just make before I finish off 

          3   here is that we have the high environmental premium 

          4   here and that is less stringent than if Kyoto was 

          5   ratified by the United States.  The United States is 

          6   part of the negotiation of Kyoto and they, at least 

          7   with this administration, are unlikely to ratify the 

          8   future administrations.  Who knows what will happen.  

          9   But we assume in here that the United States does not 

         10   ratify Kyoto ever.  What we assume is that in the 

         11   first budget period which is 2008 to 12, stopping 

         12   around there, that the United States will probably do 

         13   very little on greenhouse gases.  And it's beyond 

         14   2012.  And that whatever comes into place will be less 

         15   stringent than Kyoto.  

         16          If by chance in the election in November in the 

         17   States, Bush is not elected and the Democrat is 

         18   elected, you may very well see the States still 

         19   ratifying Kyoto.  But we don't think that's likely 

         20   overall and so we haven't built that at all into our 

         21   assumptions.  

         22          So this slide gives an indication of the 

         23   comprehensiveness and complexity undertaken by 

         24   Manitoba Hydro to forecast the prices. 

         25          So moving on away from the export prices to 




                                                                      128



          1   what are the options we looked at.  This provides a 

          2   life-cycle cost comparison of the main resource 

          3   options that Manitoba Hydro considered.  We consider 

          4   other ones as well but these are the main ones.  And 

          5   what we do is we come up with a cost in cents per 

          6   kilowatt hour here, from zero cents per kilowatt hour 

          7   to 32 cents Canadian dollars.  And what we do is we 

          8   take each option and we determine over its whole life 

          9   and each option has a different life.  You can take 

         10   different kinds of things and compare them on some 

         11   kind of common basis.  We take over the life of each 

         12   option all of the capital costs, all of the O&M 

         13   operation costs, maintenance costs, refurbishment 

         14   costs, taxes, like capital taxes, we take transmission 

         15   costs.  In the case of thermal options, like coal or 

         16   gas, we include the fuel costs.  In the case of Hydro, 

         17   we include water rentals for example.  So we include 

         18   all of these project costs, costs that are charged to 

         19   the project and we sort of average them out over the 

         20   life of the project and we divide by the energy 

         21   production over the life of the project and we 

         22   determine this energy cost in cents per kilowatt hour 

         23   here.  And now we can have some sort of screening 

         24   comparison of options.  

         25          And this is a relatively simple calculation 




                                                                      129



          1   used for initial screening purposes.  It is used quite 

          2   widely in industry for that purpose.  We do not use 

          3   this and others don't as well for final decisions on 

          4   commitments because there are a whole bunch of issues 

          5   that are not addressed by that kind of a calculation.  

          6   There is what we can call system issues that relate 

          7   to, well, what were the export prices, what are the 

          8   transmission limitations, how will these different 

          9   resources fit in with the existing system.  So we do 

         10   an initial screening with those but we need a more 

         11   complicated detailed analysis to make a final 

         12   decision.  

         13          And a good example of that is if you have 

         14   intermittent generation such as wind generation, if 

         15   you're going to sell it on the export market, to get a 

         16   premium price you need to firm it up.  You need to 

         17   have a firm product to sell into that market.  So 

         18   there's quite a major firming cost that we have to add 

         19   in when we look at it on a system basis.  And so those 

         20   kind of costs aren't included in here either.  But 

         21   this is still a useful starting point.  

         22          So let's start with looking at the alternative.  

         23   DSM or demand-side management.  It starts at 1.8 

         24   cents, the lowest costing on the whole scale.  And 

         25   TREE and RCM would fully agree with me that that's 




                                                                      130



          1   starting point.  It ranges from 1.8 to 7.2 cents a 

          2   kilowatt hour.  And why is there a range?  By the way, 

          3   that's what this light purple is showing in each one 

          4   of these, is that there's a range.  

          5          For DSM, it's composed of many different 

          6   measures, some small, some large in the residential, 

          7   industrial, commercial sectors.  And each one of those 

          8   sectors have many different possibilities.  Every 

          9   end-use we have potentially has a DSM measure.  So you 

         10   have a range of costs for all the different programs.  

         11   And what we have shown here are the costs for the 

         12   programs that Manitoba Hydro either has already 

         13   undertaken or is working on today and delivering to 

         14   end-use customers or planning to do in the next seven 

         15   years.  And so this shows the range of cost for all 

         16   those programs.  

         17          And of course, the logical thing when you're 

         18   looking at this is you start with your lowest cost 

         19   option, you commit to that.  And if you want to do 

         20   more, you go to more expensive options and you keep on 

         21   adding more expensive ones.  

         22          So the 7.2 cents is the cost of the most 

         23   expensive one we'd be putting in.  But if you wanted 

         24   to go with the old information we had without this new 

         25   study yet, if you wanted to go to a higher level of 




                                                                      131



          1   DSM more than the 356 megawatts, you can go to more 

          2   but the cost would be higher.  So this is just the 

          3   cost for the programs that we are putting in. 

          4          The next resource down here is new Hydro and 

          5   we've just included Wuskwatim, Conawapa and Gull.  

          6   That's where we have a range from 6.6 to 7.6 cents.  

          7   All three of these are attractive projects but 

          8   Wuskwatim is the lowest cost and it's also relatively 

          9   small projects and it makes it a little bit easier to 

         10   deal with.  So it's the most attractive out of the new 

         11   Hydro projects that we're looking at.  

         12          Wind generation, we show a range of 6.6 to 10.6 

         13   cents and there's a range there.  And the reason for 

         14   this range is that the wind energy cost obviously is 

         15   going to be directly related to how much wind you have 

         16   when you build these turbines.  What we're looking at 

         17   here is 450 megawatts of wind generation which would 

         18   give roughly the same amount of energy as Wuskwatim.  

         19   So we're trying to do a little bit of an apples and 

         20   apples here.  And the 6.6 cents is if you get a better 

         21   wind resource than we think is likely possible in 

         22   Manitoba for a 450 megawatt amount.  And we also have 

         23   the 10.6 is if you have a worse wind resource than we 

         24   think we likely have.  And the best guess is somewhere 

         25   in the middle, closer to the 6.6.         




                                                                      132



          1          There are other uncertainties though that we 

          2   haven't depicted in this range.  We have assumed on 

          3   this -- by the way, I should explain.  This graph is 

          4   taken from our original submission.  The only thing 

          5   we've changed really is on the wind generation, we've 

          6   taken some updated information that became available 

          7   after we did the original submission.  One of them is 

          8   that we commissioned two studies by a U.S. and 

          9   Canadian consultant looking into wind costs and they 

         10   indicated that wind costs will decrease over time a 

         11   little faster than our very preliminary information.  

         12   So we have incorporated that into our update.  We have 

         13   incorporated a whole bunch of other updates as well.  

         14   And so what we have, this assumes this updated cost 

         15   information.  It also assumes that there will not be a 

         16   whoopi program which is a federal subsidy.  By the 

         17   time you get to 2009 or 10, that program would be 

         18   finished and there's only 1,000 megawatts and we 

         19   figured that would be subscribed.  So there's various 

         20   assumptions built into it.  

         21          What we don't have into here of course is the 

         22   cost of integrating this into the system.  That would 

         23   increase the cost even more.  So you can see the costs 

         24   here and the cost of the wind will probably be 

         25   somewhat higher than the cost of Wuskwatim is our 




                                                                      133



          1   conclusion once you look at all the cost factors.      

          2         These three sets of alternatives, DSM, new Hydro 

          3   wind generation plus the supply improvements I talked 

          4   about earlier, they are the most attractive options we 

          5   are looking at and those are the ones, the four legs 

          6   of the diverse portfolio that I mentioned earlier that 

          7   we are committed to and are working with.  There are 

          8   other options, there's many other options.  Just spend 

          9   a minute on the first one here, gas turbines.  And 

         10   what's called combustion turbines are the lower costs 

         11   when you're trying to produce that's large quantities 

         12   of energy.  That's the lower cost and simple cycle.  

         13   And the lowest cost shown in here 6.1 cents.  And 

         14   that's if you take the newest technology and you take 

         15   the low forecast for natural gases prices into the 

         16   future.  

         17          And this is the price forecast that we had two 

         18   years ago when we were preparing the submission.  Even 

         19   at that time, widespread in industry, there was 

         20   concern about two things; (A) Price spikes.  Natural 

         21   gas is quite prone to huge price spikes.  And so 

         22   anybody who builds one and depends on one will be 

         23   exposed to those and will tend to be unless you enter 

         24   into long-term contracts.  But even there there's some 

         25   risk.  




                                                                      134



          1          The second is that the expectation, there was 

          2   maybe a fear in the industry that we think the 

          3   forecast will go up -- the prices for natural gas are 

          4   more likely to go up than come down compared to what 

          5   was being forecast.  But this was the information 

          6   available two years ago. 

          7          We regularly update all our background data, 

          8   all our information and we're just in the process of 

          9   updating our natural gas price forecast as part of our 

         10   regular cycle.  And what we're finding is as people 

         11   expected, the forecast for natural gas prices is 

         12   higher and we would see even higher prices than in 

         13   here. 

         14          So the gas turbines would be more expensive 

         15   than the most attractive options we looked at.  And 

         16   the other factor is that if there's an environmental 

         17   premium, more stringent regulation of nitrous oxides 

         18   or greenhouse gases, you'll see the higher end of the 

         19   cost range or even higher than we're showing here  

         20   when we get the new gas forecast in.  Coal is another 

         21   option.  I'll be honest about it, we haven't paid as 

         22   much attention to the possibility of coal in Manitoba.  

         23   Our assessments are it's probably not an attractive 

         24   option in Manitoba for a whole bunch of reasons.  

         25          However, in our export markets, it is something 




                                                                      135



          1   that was being looked at a couple of years ago.  Even 

          2   Alberta, they built a couple or building one and 

          3   planning and building another.  In the U.S. market, 

          4   what we're finding particularly now that natural gas 

          5   prices are going up, there is some new coal generation 

          6   going in.  And you can see our analysis indicates it 

          7   will be around 6.5 cents which is sort of the same 

          8   cost as Wuskwatim.  But if you put any kind of 

          9   increasing environmental regulation on it, the cost 

         10   will go up and that's why we've got it up to 9.7 cents 

         11   there.  There are other technologies as well.  They 

         12   are significantly more costly and they are not really 

         13   obviously part of the most attractive group. 

         14          So that sort of concludes looking at the 

         15   screening of our options. 

         16          Another aspect, we don't just look strictly at 

         17   the cost, we look at the range of environmental 

         18   issues.  And this one is just going to focus on the 

         19   greenhouse gas one which is quite prominent.  And what 

         20   we've done is again a life-cycle analysis over the 

         21   whole life of the facility taking account in the 

         22   construction what happens.  

         23          When you build a Hydro dam, you use concrete.  

         24   The manufacturer of the concrete produces greenhouse 

         25   gases.  When you build wind turbines, you need steel.  




                                                                      136



          1   Steel creates greenhouse gases.  No matter what you 

          2   do, you're going to have construction costs, 

          3   transportation costs, the fuel which creates 

          4   greenhouse gases. 

          5          So all of those are included.  The 

          6   transmission, all options need transmission of some 

          7   kind or another.  So the amount of right of way you 

          8   have to clear is included.  If you have to build 

          9   roads, that's included.  

         10          In the case of thermal generation, these ones 

         11   here, the biggest emitter by far though is the 

         12   combustion of the fuel creates greenhouse gases.  And 

         13   by far, this is the single biggest source of emissions 

         14   in the world is from fossil fuel combustion.  

         15          So if you look at this, you can see very 

         16   quickly Wuskwatim and wind produce much less 

         17   greenhouse gases than the others, particularly the 

         18   coal generation.  And you can also see that Wuskwatim 

         19   and wind are not just very low but actually Wuskwatim 

         20   is around half of that of wind which is a bit of a 

         21   surprise to a lot of people.  But Wuskwatim, there's 

         22   very little flooding and there is some emissions in 

         23   reservoirs.  But actually for the kind of reservoirs 

         24   in the north, there is actually very low greenhouse 

         25   gases.  




                                                                      137



          1          And so this analysis was done by the Pembina 

          2   Institute for Appropriate Development and an 

          3   environmental organization in Alberta.  And you can 

          4   see that Wuskwatim is less than wind but they are so 

          5   low that essentially we can just call them zero.  

          6          DSM also would have extremely low greenhouse 

          7   gases.  Because of such a huge range of measures that 

          8   you'd undertake, we didn't ask the Pembina Institute 

          9   to look at the DSM.  Without having an evaluation, we 

         10   fully expect that it will be essentially zero just 

         11   like the wind and Wuskwatim. 

         12          So there are other emissions we could look at  

         13   but I don't think we want to take the time to do that 

         14   today.  

         15          The overall conclusion of the preliminary 

         16   screening in terms of the economics and environmental 

         17   aspects is that the most attractive options available 

         18   to us in Manitoba are DSM, or PowerSmart, Wuskwatim 

         19   and wind as well as the supply side efficiency 

         20   improvements we talked about earlier. 

         21          I'd like to now move to the detailed system 

         22   economics to evaluate more fully the Wuskwatim 

         23   economics.  Before we present the economic 

         24   evaluations, it will be useful to explain a little bit 

         25   of the economic methodology we used in non-technical 




                                                                      138



          1   terms.  

          2          I'm an engineer by background and when I got 

          3   into this field, I had a bit of a hurdle and luckily 

          4   there was some economists around but I don't expect 

          5   there's too many economists in the audience here so I 

          6   think it would be useful for me to give a bit of a 

          7   non-technical explanation of one of the fundamental 

          8   criteria we have used in our economic evaluations.  

          9   And that is what is the internal rate of return or IRR 

         10   which we've used again and again.           

         11          The IRR is used to report the detailed sequence 

         12   economic evaluations.  It includes all the costs we 

         13   talked about earlier in the levelized cost, the 

         14   capital cost, transmission cost, everything else.  It 

         15   also includes all of the other system kind of costs 

         16   and benefits that I was referring to, what export 

         17   revenues do we get?  What are the transmission limits?  

         18   What is the load growth like?  What is our existing 

         19   system doing?  What are the thermal costs?  All of the 

         20   various factors are included in this more detailed set 

         21   of evaluations and wrapped into this IRR.  

         22          So what is the IRR?  And I hope the economists 

         23   in the crowd and the financial people will forgive me, 

         24   but the IRR is the long-term average monetary return 

         25   to the project proponent from the investment.  So what 




                                                                      139



          1   we mean by that is that the proponent in any project 

          2   invests into the project.  And then what return do we 

          3   get over the long run on the average from that 

          4   investment?  You can say, okay, so that's what you're 

          5   getting and we expressed it in per cent return, annual 

          6   per cent return.  But what do you do with that?  

          7          Well, the first thing we do is compare it to 

          8   the economic criteria for what is acceptable for a 

          9   project.  So you calculate the IRR for a particular 

         10   project.  You do your very best guess as to what will 

         11   the IRR over the long term be?  And then you compare 

         12   it against your economic criteria or hurdle rate.  And 

         13   this is based fundamentally on Manitoba Hydro's hurdle 

         14   rate factors and is being adopted by the project.  

         15          So what we develop is for a low to medium risk 

         16   project is that the IRR must be greater or equal to a 

         17   6 to 10 per cent real return.  Okay.  So what do we do 

         18   with that?  A 6 to 10 per cent real return, what is 

         19   the significance of that?  Particularly, I'm using the 

         20   word "real."  

         21          When economists speak about the real return, 

         22   what's referred to there is over and above inflation.  

         23   So this is what's higher than inflation and I'll 

         24   explain right away in this little calculation here.    

         25          First of all, let's start with the borrowing 




                                                                      140



          1   cost of the project.  That's probably the best 

          2   starting point to look at.  The Wuskwatim project on 

          3   its long-term debt, on its long-term borrowing 30 year 

          4   kind of money will be about 7 and a half per cent, 

          5   7.45 per cent.  So that's what the cost of the project 

          6   of borrowing money would be.  Now, that is the normal 

          7   way we think about borrowing costs.  If you think 

          8   about your return on your mutual funds or Canadian 

          9   Savings Bonds or whatever.  And that's what that would 

         10   compare to is the 7.45 per cent is the borrowing rate. 

         11          If you express it in real terms, if you take 

         12   inflation out of that or move inflation, the same rate 

         13   in real terms is 5.34 per cent, say 5.3 per cent.  So 

         14   the real borrowing for the Wuskwatim project on the 

         15   markets would be 5.3 per cent.  When we say that the 

         16   project has to have a 6 to 10 per cent IRR to be 

         17   acceptable, we're saying that like the 6 per cent 

         18   would be for a low risk project, it is higher than the 

         19   5.34.  And what we're saying for a low risk project, 

         20   it would only have to meet a 6 per cent return and 

         21   there will be about a .7 per cent buffer between the 

         22   borrowing cost and the low risk return.  And that 

         23   little bit of a buffer provides a profit and it 

         24   provides a buffer against risk scenarios.  

         25          But a project like Wuskwatim or wind, probably 




                                                                      141



          1   a 6 per cent return isn't really good enough and 

          2   Manitoba Hydro wouldn't likely find that acceptable.  

          3   It would be higher up on the range although not all 

          4   the way to 10 per cent.  

          5          Let's just take 10 per cent as the other end of 

          6   the range.  If you have a 10 per cent project, that's 

          7   about 4.7 per cent higher IRR than the borrowing rate.  

          8   And that gives you a very substantial buffer to have 

          9   risks happen.  And there's still to be a profit above 

         10   the borrowing cost.  

         11          So that's just a basic explanation of what the 

         12   IRR is and I hope that helps in the understanding of 

         13   the information we're presenting. 

         14          So we'll start now with the actual evaluations 

         15   that we did and I'll start with the analysis we 

         16   provided in the original submission back in April 

         17   2003.  In that submission, we did a number of analyses 

         18   and the first one is the advancement of Wuskwatim.  We 

         19   have said in our base case that we need Wuskwatim in 

         20   2020 to meet Manitoba load requirements.  Said, well, 

         21   we're going to propose to advance it from 2020 to 2009 

         22   to get the export benefits.  

         23          And when you just look at the advancement, we 

         24   did very detailed calculations including all those 

         25   factors we discussed earlier and we get an expected 




                                                                      142



          1   return with our expected export prices.  And all are 

          2   best guesses of 10.3 per cent IRR.  Real.  So above 

          3   inflation.  So that's a very attractive return.  And 

          4   given the relatively low risk of Wuskwatim, we felt 

          5   that's a very worthwhile project and we felt very 

          6   comfortable proceeding on that basis.  Around 10 per 

          7   cent we find a very attractive return.  

          8          And if you look at those low and high export 

          9   price bounds that we showed earlier, it drops around 2 

         10   per cent.  If you go to low, it goes up by around 2 

         11   per cent, it goes to high.  It's more or less 

         12   balanced.  And so no surprises and we drew comfort 

         13   from that because even at 8.5 per cent, you are still 

         14   getting a healthy profit on the project. 

         15          We provided in November an update to that 

         16   evaluation.  A number of things happened.  Everything 

         17   is changing all the time and so we incorporated all 

         18   the updates that were available in November and update 

         19   our analyses.  There were a number of factors which 

         20   would tend to cause the IRR to reduce.  One of them, 

         21   Wuskwatim got delayed from 2009 to 10.  There were a 

         22   number of other factors.  The transmission cost 

         23   estimate.  We had a new estimate on that.  It hadn't 

         24   been quite as advanced as the generation one earlier.  

         25   That was updated and it's slightly higher on the 




                                                                      143



          1   transmission side.  

          2          We had a number of other changes, for example, 

          3   probably as most of you are aware, the U.S./Canadian 

          4   exchange rate has been a major shift in the last 

          5   little while.  And even the long-term forecasts.  We 

          6   had all these forecasts, there will be a shift in the 

          7   exchange rate in the long term.  We're now even 

          8   forecasting, it will be a little bit further and that 

          9   reduced the IRR Wuskwatim and any other export project 

         10   like wind.  

         11          And so there were a number of other factors as 

         12   well but they tended to drive slightly down the IRR.  

         13   There were some offsetting.  The most important one is 

         14   that the load forecast.  We experienced high load 

         15   forecast the last couple of years and we have a new 

         16   load forecast which is significantly higher than it 

         17   was a year ago.  So when you put all these puts and 

         18   takes together, the IRR is now 10.0 per cent instead 

         19   of 10.3.  It's still around 10 per cent.  Essentially 

         20   not much change at all.  So Wuskwatim is still very 

         21   attractive. 

         22          So moving onto sensitivities.  We have to do 

         23   risk analyses.  So we've done many different risk 

         24   analyses.  And we won't have time to go into them in a 

         25   lot of detail but I'll start off with first of all in 




                                                                      144



          1   the original submission, I had mentioned we looked at 

          2   the advancement of Wuskwatim.  We also looked at what 

          3   if you hadn't put Wuskwatim in in 2020 for domestic 

          4   load.  What if you never built Wuskwatim in the base 

          5   case and what if you now built Wuskwatim forever for 

          6   export?  So that's a totally different way to look at 

          7   it.  

          8          We looked at that and we did all of the same 

          9   detailed sequence evaluations and what we got is 

         10   somewhat coincidental.  It is exactly the same IRR.  

         11   You wouldn't normally expect to see them exactly the 

         12   same but it turned out they were.  But that was partly 

         13   due to rounding.  

         14          So the long-term economics was 10.3 our best 

         15   guess.  We did low and high.  It was also plus/minus 2 

         16   per cent on the IRR.  No surprise there.  We also 

         17   looked at the individual expected price forecast and 

         18   they fell within the low and the high which is more or 

         19   less what you'd expect.  So no surprises and we drew 

         20   comfort from that.  

         21          And then we did a number of sensitivities and 

         22   maybe let's go through those briefly.  I mentioned 

         23   capital cost is a possibility.  We've done lots of 

         24   work to make sure we've got a good capital cost 

         25   estimate.  But what if the capital cost goes up 15 per 




                                                                      145



          1   cent?  $95 million basic increase in cost.  Well, the 

          2   IRR would drop around a per cent.  On the other hand, 

          3   there is an equal likelihood of a capital cost 

          4   decreasing like they did in limestone.  And well, the 

          5   cost would -- the IRR would increase by 1.4 per cent.  

          6   So they are more or less the same, plus or minus 1 per 

          7   cent.  

          8          What if the Hydro plant, what if we had less 

          9   water available to Wuskwatim and we did a sensitivity 

         10   where we only reduced the flows on the Burntwood River 

         11   not the rest of our system.  That's more stringent to 

         12   Wuskwatim because if the whole system was lower, then 

         13   the value of Wuskwatim becomes more important.  But we 

         14   did a sensitivity if only the Burntwood and a 10 per 

         15   cent reduction on the Burntwood would cause only 0.5, 

         16   half a per cent drop in IRR, more significant but it's 

         17   not all that major and still, the project very 

         18   profitable.  

         19          There are a whole bunch of other sensitivities 

         20   one could do.  We did a 300 megawatt plus or minus on 

         21   the tie line.  We did sensitivities there.  It could 

         22   also be thought of more or less DSM, more or less 

         23   supply.  With a whole bunch of differences in our 

         24   future would do is impact how much room there is on 

         25   the tie line.  When you look at the 300 megawatts 




                                                                      146



          1   either way, very small impact on the IRR.  

          2          So we also looked at, and this is back in the 

          3   original submission, what if we delayed Wuskwatim with 

          4   all our information then one year from 2009 to 10 and 

          5   we said there will be a significant dollar loss to the 

          6   corporation in, I can't remember, 25 million or 

          7   something in that order, but the IRR would only drop 

          8   0.1 per cent?  And the reason that there is a big 

          9   dollar loss but the IRR doesn't change much is when 

         10   you've -- if you haven't got a good investment but you 

         11   have to wait to make it, then there's a loss even from 

         12   doing that.  So that's part of the explanation there. 

         13          What we were talking about so far, independent 

         14   sensitivities.  Nobody knows exactly how the future is 

         15   going to unfold so we do sensitivities.  And the 

         16   general trend is that various factors will offset each 

         17   other.  You'll have puts and takes, pluses and 

         18   minuses.  But what if a really bad scenario happened 

         19   that had a very low likelihood that a number of things 

         20   all went bad and nothing went good to offset?  So that 

         21   is a very low likelihood but it is possible.  So we 

         22   looked at an extreme downside combination of what if 

         23   we had the low export prices?  What if we had the 

         24   capital cost go up?  And what if the flow on the 

         25   Burntwood was lower permanently by almost 10 per cent?  




                                                                      147



          1   We say 10 per cent, it's actually just a tinge less, 

          2   but a permanent reduction in the water available to 

          3   Wuskwatim?  Now there was a substantial drop in the 

          4   IRR, 3.7 per cent, but the IRR is still 6.6 per cent.  

          5   Our borrowing cost, real borrowing cost was 5.34 

          6   you'll recall.  So we still have a 1.3 per cent profit 

          7   on Wuskwatim even in this very bad scenario.  

          8          Another comparison you can draw, and this is 

          9   something called the weighted average cost to capital 

         10   which I don't think I can go into explanation right 

         11   now.  The weighted average cost to capital for 

         12   Wuskwatim including an imputed return on equity is 

         13   around 6 per cent.  So here, you've got .6 per cent 

         14   higher IRRs than our cost to capital.  Still a 

         15   profitable project.  

         16          I should add an extreme upside sensitivity 

         17   could have been done and I haven't showed that here.  

         18   But you could have an equal likelihood of an extreme 

         19   upside happening.  And Lynn will present one later on, 

         20   too.  

         21          We looked at the advancement I had mentioned 

         22   earlier.  This is that same information.  We looked at 

         23   the low and the high.  We looked at different export 

         24   rate scenarios.  I won't take the time here today.  We 

         25   looked at other sensitivities here as well.  And we 




                                                                      148



          1   looked at what if you, in the original submission, 

          2   added 250 megawatts of wind?  The impact from the IRR 

          3   is 0.05 per cent, virtually negligible.  What if you 

          4   doubled the amount of DSM you were planning to do in 

          5   the future?  The same.  Nearly negligible, 0.05 per 

          6   cent in the IRR.  So Wuskwatim is virtually 

          7   unaffected.  What if you add both of them together, .1 

          8   per cent?  Still very little effect.  

          9          However, now we'll go to something else which 

         10   is a little bit more significant.  All of our analyses 

         11   that I've been talking about so far will look at the 

         12   full range of flows that may happen.  When we do the 

         13   expected, we know that in any particular year, you may 

         14   have a drought or you may have a flood or you may have 

         15   a middle kind of year.  In all of our expected 

         16   analyses, we take that full range of flow 

         17   possibilities.  We do an evaluation for each one and 

         18   then we add them all together.  We average them and 

         19   that gives our expected.  

         20          But in this one, what we've done is a 

         21   sensitivity.  We said what if we had the worst system 

         22   drought happen just as Wuskwatim is coming on line?  

         23   Last year at the P.U.B. status update hearings, there 

         24   was an extensive discussion of the 1987 to 1992 

         25   drought and that's what we've utilized here.  So we 




                                                                      149



          1   said what if Wuskwatim comes in and just as Wuskwatim 

          2   comes in, we have this extreme system drought happen?  

          3   Well, the IRR does drop significantly, .6 per cent, 

          4   but it's not that big of a drop.  9.7 per cent higher 

          5   is still a very profitable project. 

          6          We did a few other sensitivities.  The one I 

          7   think I'll just focus on before moving on is medium 

          8   low load growth, this one here.  The medium low load 

          9   growth is what if the load forecast figuring is wrong?  

         10   What if the load in the future is going to be less 

         11   than we were predicting?  What if TREE was right?  And 

         12   we can do a lot more DSM and/or our load forecast was 

         13   too high.  

         14          So we took our medium low load forecast and did 

         15   an analysis and still left the DSM in by the way and 

         16   we got the IRR only dropped 0.3 per cent?  Again, very 

         17   small impact.  So if we have a significantly lower 

         18   load forecast and/or much more DSM, five times more 

         19   DSM, we have the IRR still only drop a very little 

         20   amount.  Or what if you did a whole bunch of more 

         21   wind, some sort of combination of these?  

         22          So moving on, speaking about wind.

         23          THE CHAIRMAN:  Can I briefly interrupt you?  

         24   We're speaking about sensitivity and wind.  I've 

         25   become very sensitive to the lack of it here.  I 




                                                                      150



          1   wonder if we can stand for 30 seconds. 

          2   

          3          (BRIEF RECESS)

          4   

          5          MR. WOJCZYNSKI:  I actually don't have very 

          6   much more.  So we're just drawing to a close here.     

          7          Speaking of wind, in the submissions and 

          8   interrogatories, contrary to what some participants 

          9   have suggested, we did much work to consider the 

         10   economics of Wuskwatim in relation to alternatives, 

         11   including wind and DSM.  We did this by demonstrating 

         12   that Wuskwatim continues to be economic when tested in 

         13   sensitivities with the maximum amount of wind and/or 

         14   DSM that was reasonably likely to be false and 

         15   economic -- sorry, reasonably likely to be feasible 

         16   and economic.  It wasn't a Freudian slip either.  

         17          Now how do we do this?  First of all, we 

         18   always, when doing the IRR or the other sequence 

         19   evaluations, we take a case without Wuskwatim and a 

         20   case with Wuskwatim.  And so in a case without 

         21   Wuskwatim, we said is we don't know how much wind or 

         22   DSM ultimately will be economic in the future.  We 

         23   don't have that with great certainty but we do have a 

         24   sense of what the upper end of the likely range is.  

         25   And we say let's put in that maximum amount that 




                                                                      151



          1   likely will be economic and feasible.  And then when 

          2   we put that in, then we add in Wuskwatim and we see 

          3   the economics.  And we determine, okay, if Wuskwatim 

          4   is then economic, then -- okay, so Wuskwatim is 

          5   economic, you put in all the economic wind or DSM so 

          6   they are both economic but you couldn't do more wind 

          7   or DSM because it isn't economic.  

          8          And our commitment in Manitoba Hydro is we're 

          9   going to develop all the economic and feasible wind in 

         10   DSM.  And so as long as you check that when you put in 

         11   all that's economic and feasible and Wuskwatim is 

         12   still economic, then what Wuskwatim will be competing 

         13   with is uneconomic wind or uneconomic DSM.  And so we 

         14   have been assessing the alternatives to Wuskwatim in 

         15   that regard.  And that was the means of doing that. 

         16          So we believe that the work we had done is 

         17   conclusive and sufficient to draw conclusions about 

         18   the alternatives.  But of course, that's why we have 

         19   this hearing process to test that.  However, in 

         20   response to concerns expressed by some participants 

         21   that we should have compared an exact amount of wind 

         22   versus an exact amount of Hydro, we did do a 

         23   comparison of that.  And we compared in this case wind 

         24   to 450 megawatts.  

         25          The 450 megawatts of wind gives the same amount 




                                                                      152



          1   of energy as Wuskwatim and we took our updated 

          2   information and we did a long-term economic evaluation 

          3   comparison of wind and Wuskwatim and we looked at 

          4   putting in 450 megawatts of wind in 2009 versus 

          5   putting in the Wuskwatim and we did our IRR.  Now, 

          6   this is using the same assumptions we used in the 

          7   submission.  We used updated capital costs for the 

          8   wind but we used the same other assumptions to be 

          9   consistent with the original submission.  And what we 

         10   got was a 10.3 per cent IRR for Wuskwatim and we got a 

         11   6.1 per cent IRR for the wind for 2009.  

         12          Now, that assumes that there is no federal 

         13   subsidy.  If there was a federal subsidy, the wind IRR 

         14   would have increased by around 8 per cent, something 

         15   in that order.  But it still would have been clearly a 

         16   lot less economic than Wuskwatim.  And also, I need to 

         17   point out that we did assume lower capital cost for 

         18   the wind because we're assuming that capital costs 

         19   were reduced 16 per cent into the future to reach 

         20   2009.  We don't know for sure if that will happen but 

         21   our consultants tell us that it likely will.  And 

         22   we've done our best guess at what we call the firming 

         23   cost, the integration cost in the system when you take 

         24   the wind and you want to sell it into a long-term firm 

         25   market, the cost of doing that on our system.  So 




                                                                      153



          1   we've taken all our best information and that's our 

          2   best guess right now. 

          3          MR. SARGEANT:  Can I just ask a question for 

          4   clarification?  I think I know the answer but you're 

          5   talking about 450 megawatts of wind and we're talking 

          6   about 200 megawatts of Wuskwatim.  Is it because of 

          7   the inefficiencies of wind or?

          8          MR. WOJCZYNSKI:  It's not inefficiency.  The 

          9   basic explanation is that the main product that we 

         10   need to look at from either Wuskwatim or wind is not 

         11   the capacity but the energy output.  You can have a 

         12   200 megawatt -- let me use the wind.  That's the 

         13   easiest example.  

         14          Let's say you have 450 megawatts of wind.  You 

         15   can have enough wind available so that 20 per cent of 

         16   the time you could produce electricity or energy.  You 

         17   can have the same 450 megawatt wind facility but let's 

         18   say you've got a much better wind resource.  So 

         19   instead of 20 or 25 per cent of the time producing 

         20   energy, it was 40 or 45 per cent of the time.  Even if 

         21   I produce double the amount of energy from the same 

         22   facility.  So it's the amount of energy that's more 

         23   important.  

         24          So what we did is Wuskwatim, we know its energy 

         25   output very well from all the work we've done.  And it 




                                                                      154



          1   has something in the order of over 80 per cent 

          2   capacity factor.  Capacity factor is how much -- you 

          3   take the full capacity and if you take the energy, how 

          4   much of the year would it have to run to get that 

          5   energy.  That's over 80 per cent.  

          6          Wind has, our best guess, our best information 

          7   that the wind resource in Manitoba, the best wind 

          8   resource in Manitoba is around probably 35 per cent 

          9   capacity factor.  So you only produce energy 35 per 

         10   cent of the time.  So we made the wind facility bigger 

         11   so that it would produce the same amount of energy as 

         12   Wuskwatim.  So we compare the two and we use the 

         13   updated assumptions and we say that Wuskwatim is more 

         14   economic. 

         15          So moving on to the conclusions and that pretty 

         16   well just about wraps up.  We've got one more overhead 

         17   to go through before the conclusions.  And that is all 

         18   of the economic analyses we've been talking about so 

         19   far deals with the monetary benefits to the 

         20   proponents.  That's the joint project owned by NCN and 

         21   Manitoba Hydro.  There is another important 

         22   perspective and that's the social benefit.  That is 

         23   from a society as a whole in Manitoba.  

         24          And so what we had, and this is there's a 

         25   standard set of techniques for doing this, what we had 




                                                                      155



          1   is an expert consultant take our analysis.  He started 

          2   with ours but then he made adjustments to a social 

          3   point of view.  And that was by this report by the way 

          4   that details this was provided in our supplemental 

          5   filing last year.  And there were adjustments made for 

          6   taxes, wage benefits, government, other government 

          7   costs, environmental and social costs were considered.  

          8   And let me just give you a basic simple example of 

          9   what happens. 

         10          In the project, the project pays the provincial 

         11   government capital taxes and water rentals and they 

         12   are significant.  And that's a cost to the project and 

         13   we have included it in our evaluation as a cost to our 

         14   project.  But that's not a fee for service.  We're not 

         15   getting anything in return in terms of a fee.  No one 

         16   is giving us concrete or service per se.  So that's 

         17   considered a transfer to the government and a transfer 

         18   within society and not a cost to society.  So that's 

         19   taken out of the analysis.  

         20          But there are some other costs that the 

         21   proponent doesn't experience at our cost.  And the 

         22   easiest example is we've got this innovated 

         23   pre-project training program and we at Manitoba Hydro 

         24   and the project with NCN are co-funders of that 

         25   project with the Provincial and Federal Governments.  




                                                                      156



          1   But our project doesn't see the cost the Feds and the 

          2   Province are putting in.  It actually is a cost to the 

          3   society.  That cost is put back in.  

          4          There are other adjustments that are explained 

          5   in the report.  But when you take all of those and do 

          6   the adjustments and you use the social discount rate, 

          7   not what the developer would use as the hurdle rate, 

          8   but the social discount rate, the current thinking of 

          9   what the social discount rate should be according to 

         10   our consultant is a 6 per cent real discount rate and 

         11   that gave us benefits of -- the exact number is not 

         12   critical here -- but in the order of $267 million, 

         13   benefits to society in Manitoba for advancing 

         14   Wuskwatim.  

         15          Anyways, that's a very significant amount of 

         16   money and that's, in effect, larger than what we, as 

         17   the project proponents, would see.  So the social 

         18   benefit is quite large.  There is some thinking maybe 

         19   6 per cent social discount rates should really maybe 

         20   be 8.  So he did a sensitivity and it's still very 

         21   large at $151 million.  

         22          So not shown here as well but provided in the 

         23   rebuttal that we filed on Friday, social benefit cost 

         24   evaluation was also undertaken to compare Wuskwatim 

         25   with 450 megawatts of wind.  The study concluded that 




                                                                      157



          1   Wuskwatim was more attractive than expanding the wind 

          2   not just for the economic perspective of the 

          3   proponents but even more so from a social perspective. 

          4          And just the last comment here is that 

          5   particularly in terms of Wuskwatim.  So what the 

          6   social benefit cost evaluation shows is that the 

          7   project will not only benefit Manitoba Hydro and NCN 

          8   but also benefit workers because of employment and 

          9   income.  Taxpayers because of significant water 

         10   rentals and capital tax.  And the environment because 

         11   of displacing emission causing generation. 

         12          So to wrap up the conclusions for the economic 

         13   and the screening part of the presentation, the 

         14   internal rate of return for Wuskwatim of 10 per cent 

         15   real is a very attractive investment given the 

         16   relatively low level of risk.  We did extensive 

         17   sensitivities, demonstrated that the Wuskwatim 

         18   economics are robust for all the reasonable risks and 

         19   verifying and confirming that this is relatively a low 

         20   risk project.  

         21          And lastly, we did the sensitivities as I 

         22   indicated and that even if you had much higher DSM, 

         23   like five times the DSM and/or a much higher wind 

         24   generation, the Wuskwatim IRR would not reduce 

         25   significantly.  And if we did find that that much wind 




                                                                      158



          1   and/or DSM was economic and viable, that we could 

          2   proceed with those legs as well.  

          3          Thank you.  And now I'd like to turn it over to 

          4   Lynn Wray, Division Manager of Treasury and Business 

          5   Analysis who will present the financial aspects of the 

          6   evaluation.  

          7          MS. WRAY:  Thank you.  Ed began his 

          8   presentation by recalling the terms of reference to 

          9   this aspect of the review and the first part that he 

         10   has addressed is the economic viability of Wuskwatim.  

         11   The part that I will address is where we were asked to 

         12   look at the effects, if any, of Wuskwatim proposals on 

         13   Manitoba Hydro customer rates and the corporation's 

         14   financial stability. 

         15          The financial analysis, unlike the economic 

         16   project analysis, also includes the effects of the 

         17   arrangements with NCN.  In other words, it's from a 

         18   Manitoba Hydro perspective as one of the participants 

         19   urged that we do. 

         20          The focus of the financial analysis rather than 

         21   looking at internal rates of return provides 

         22   projections of Manitoba Hydro's future financial 

         23   statements with and without the Wuskwatim advancement.  

         24   In this way, you can see the effects of the project's 

         25   costs and revenues on Manitoba Hydro's debt position 




                                                                      159



          1   and income statement and financing requirements.  

          2   We've also calculated the potential effect on customer 

          3   rates if all of the financial benefits from the 

          4   project were steered back to electricity customers.  

          5          And finally, it's important to note, as I just 

          6   mentioned, this financial analysis fully includes the 

          7   effect of Hydro's transactions with the partnership 

          8   and its loans to NCN.  This is a difference from the 

          9   economic evaluations discussed by Ed which analyzed 

         10   the cash flows from a total project perspective.  The 

         11   two types of analyses we believe are complimentary. 

         12          This is a schematic of the financial 

         13   arrangements between Manitoba Hydro and NCN as laid 

         14   out in the summary of understandings which was filed 

         15   as part of I believe the first round interrogatories.  

         16   The numbers are the same as those provided in the 

         17   summary of understandings and you'll see at the top of 

         18   the overhead, we are assuming that the cost at 

         19   inservice at 2009 in this case is at $756 million for 

         20   the generating station.  

         21          Now recall that the partnership is for the 

         22   generating station and the transmission facilities are 

         23   outside of the partnership that's financed by Manitoba 

         24   Hydro. 

         25          The two partners essentially have 33 per cent 




                                                                      160



          1   and 67 per cent shares in the partnership.  Manitoba 

          2   Hydro, as you'll see, is the general partner.  There's 

          3   a very small 0.1 per cent share there with the balance 

          4   making up the balance of the 67 per cent.  The general 

          5   partner is, in essence, Manitoba Hydro in its role of 

          6   operating the plant.  

          7          In terms of a debt equity ratio, the 

          8   partnership will finance the $756 million project, 75 

          9   per cent by debt, 25 per cent by equity which works 

         10   out to the numbers that you see here.  And NCN we are 

         11   assuming will make a cash investment of just over $20 

         12   million and will borrow its remaining equity 

         13   investment of $41.5 million from Manitoba Hydro and 

         14   Manitoba Hydro will lend NCN that equity money at a 

         15   premium over Hydro's cost of borrowing.  And this one 

         16   will be repaid from a part of NCN's dividend proceeds 

         17   from the project. 

         18          Manitoba Hydro will be providing a project 

         19   itself with financing for the 75 per cent debt share 

         20   and that will be at Manitoba Hydro's cost of 

         21   borrowing.  

         22          The partnership will also reimburse Manitoba 

         23   Hydro for the use of transmission, for operating the 

         24   plant, for marketing the energy and for any other 

         25   expenses incurred as a result of the project going 




                                                                      161



          1   forward.  

          2          Turning to the way that we did the financial 

          3   analysis.  The costs that I've just mentioned will be 

          4   financed by Manitoba Hydro with the exception of the 

          5   $20.5 million or so that will come from NCN and that 

          6   will then be repaid over the period of the period of 

          7   the project through the project's net returns and also 

          8   from interest on loans which are made to NCN.          

          9          We basically did the financial analysis two 

         10   ways.  We looked at it from the point of view first of 

         11   all of assuming that the rates would be the same as in 

         12   the base case.  Now the base case in this case is 

         13   where Wuskwatim comes into service in 2020 rather than 

         14   being advanced.  And we did a set of financial 

         15   projections that extended our forecast out to that 

         16   period.  Figured out roughly what rate increases would 

         17   be and we determined that there would be less than the 

         18   rate of inflation.  We then overlaid Wuskwatim 

         19   advancement to 2009 and held rate increases the same 

         20   throughout that period and determined in that way what 

         21   the impact would be on Manitoba Hydro's financial 

         22   position, its income statement, its balance sheet and 

         23   so forth.  

         24          The other way we looked at it which is an 

         25   alternative point of view is to assume that Wuskwatim 




                                                                      162



          1   coming in at 2009 will get you to the same financial 

          2   results if Wuskwatim were to come in at 2020 and then 

          3   the change occurs in the rate increases that will be 

          4   required.  And what that allows you to do is to 

          5   determine the rate benefits that will accrue from the 

          6   project.  

          7          So the first overhead is looking at it from the 

          8   point of view of holding rate increases the same  and 

          9   seeing what that would do to Manitoba Hydro's net 

         10   income.  And you can see that there is a very 

         11   significant positive impact on net income over the 

         12   period up to 2035 which is where we did our financial 

         13   analysis.  Obviously the useful life of the plant 

         14   would go on long beyond that.  And you can see that by 

         15   the time you get up to 2035, you're seeing increases 

         16   of close to $100 million in Manitoba Hydro's net 

         17   income if you have low export prices and over $200 

         18   million if you have high export prices.  Those are 

         19   very significant numbers in the context of base case 

         20   types of net income in the sort of hundred million 

         21   dollar range.  

         22          You can also see that even at the front end 

         23   where you would expect there to be less of a 

         24   beneficial effect because you've got your costs up 

         25   front and you don't get your revenues right away 




                                                                      163



          1   because the units are coming into service one by one, 

          2   you can see that there's only a couple of years there 

          3   where we're not actually adding to net income and that 

          4   the effect is very very small. 

          5          Now, if you were to take the additional net 

          6   income that I showed you in the previous draft and use 

          7   it to, in effect, pay down Manitoba Hydro's debt.  Or 

          8   another way of looking at it is just building up our 

          9   retained earnings, what this graph shows is the change 

         10   in Manitoba Hydro's debt equity ratio.  In very simple 

         11   terms, a debt ratio is the ratio of total debt to 

         12   total assets.  

         13          The actual calculation is a bit more 

         14   complicated than that but that gives you the idea.  

         15   And what we wanted to do is two things.  We wanted to 

         16   see over the longer term what this would do in terms 

         17   of benefit.  And as you can see, that's a pretty 

         18   substantial benefit, those $100 to $200 million in 

         19   additional income that you saw in the preceding graph 

         20   have managed to get our debt  equity -- rather our 

         21   debt ratio down by between 7 and 18 per cent by 2035. 

         22          So we wanted to see what the benefits would be 

         23   if those profits were retained in Manitoba Hydro.  But 

         24   we also wanted to test a particular risk aspect of the 

         25   financial analysis and that's this period here which 




                                                                      164



          1   is at the front end.  

          2          You'll recall that I said that when you get the 

          3   front end of any project, you have your costs up 

          4   front, you have your revenues coming in later.  So the 

          5   real question is is it going to cause a very abrupt 

          6   shift in the corporation's financial position?  And we 

          7   wanted to see how significant that would be.  And what 

          8   we found is that the highest point here in terms of 

          9   the change that's happening in our debt ratio is 1.6 

         10   per cent.  So whatever our debt ratio is at that point 

         11   in time, 1.6 per cent is all that would be added to it 

         12   as a result of Wuskwatim coming on.  And then you can 

         13   see that by as early as 2015, which is about six years 

         14   after the project starts or 2017 if you have low 

         15   prices, which is eight years after the project starts, 

         16   then you're back to where you were on your debt ratio.  

         17   And this is the point if you choose where you can flow 

         18   those benefits to rate payers you're back in the same 

         19   financial position as you were when you started and 

         20   this area under the curve here could be flowed to rate 

         21   payers.  And this is a decision that would be 

         22   obviously brought before the Public Utilities Board.

         23          Now, this overhead looks at the other type of 

         24   analysis which is where you assume that instead of 

         25   your improving your debt ratio, improving your 




                                                                      165



          1   financial net income, you've got now to a break-even 

          2   point where you would have been even if you hadn't 

          3   brought in Wuskwatim early, what would that do 

          4   potentially for rate payers?  And you can see the 

          5   shaded area shows the amount of rate savings that are 

          6   available.  

          7          What we're looking at here are cumulative 

          8   benefits in 2002 dollars.  And you can see it starts, 

          9   as I mentioned, six years to eight years after the 

         10   project starts.  And that by the end of the period 

         11   here, you have very significant amounts going to rate 

         12   payers.  Even under the low price range, there's 

         13   potential for about $87 million in rate savings. 

         14          Just to put this in context, the range that 

         15   we're looking at here in the dollars of the day once 

         16   the project is up and running is somewhere between $10 

         17   and $30 million per year ongoing in rate savings for 

         18   customers. 

         19          Ed went through a number of risk sensitivities 

         20   on the economic evaluations.  For the most part, we 

         21   can rely on those directionally when we look at the 

         22   financial impacts.  But we also wanted to do one or 

         23   two key risks just again to test those up-front 

         24   impacts on the corporation's financial stability and 

         25   again to look at the type of range of changes that 




                                                                      166



          1   might make in rate benefits. 

          2          So this column here, we're looking at that 

          3   little bump, up-front bump in the debt ratio and the 

          4   base case we just talked about, 1.6 per cent addition 

          5   to the debt ratio, even if you have low export prices, 

          6   that isn't going to change.  And the reason is that 

          7   you are really at the front end of the project and 

          8   you're not terribly sensitive to revenues at that 

          9   point.  It's more of the cost side.  

         10          So we decided we would look at the cost side 

         11   and we assumed a 15 per cent capital cost increase 

         12   which is somewhere in the order of $127 million 

         13   inservice to the cost of the project.  And what that 

         14   did was it adds .5 per cent to the 1.6 per cent.  We 

         15   then looked at the circumstance Ed talked about which 

         16   is what if you had the worst drought on record 

         17   coinciding with the start-up of the plant?  I don't 

         18   think this is particularly likely but we wanted to 

         19   test it out because it is something that is of concern 

         20   obviously to rate payers.  And the addition there is 

         21   .3 per cent to the 1.6 per cent.  

         22          So if you were to have a combination of the low 

         23   export prices, the 15 per cent capital cost increase 

         24   and an extreme drought at the start-up of the plant, 

         25   adding all those up, get 2.4 per cent.  What we said 




                                                                      167



          1   here is it's going to be less than 2.4 per cent 

          2   because if you have drought occurring with low export 

          3   prices, that means low import prices too.  So you're 

          4   going to get some benefit when you're importing to 

          5   help yourself out with the drought.  So the 2.4 is 

          6   actually overstated.  

          7          Now if you look at the other column which is 

          8   once you've got past this temporary hump and you're 

          9   into the benefits that are potentially available for 

         10   rate payers, you add up all the adverse circumstances 

         11   and you still have $61 million in 2002 dollars 

         12   available potentially as rate benefits.  That would 

         13   translate into something like $8 million a year 

         14   ongoing to consumers.  So even under a very adverse 

         15   combination, we think there's significant benefits 

         16   there for consumers.  

         17          We also, in a very limited way, took a look at 

         18   our high case.  And this is not the highest case there 

         19   could be because we didn't have available to us the 

         20   highest water flow run that would be an analogy to the 

         21   lowest drought case.  But we did have the high export 

         22   prices.  And again, it doesn't -- it's insensitive at 

         23   the front end to that bump in the debt ratio because 

         24   the revenues haven't really got going yet.  But the 

         25   capital cost decrease actually of course reduces the 




                                                                      168



          1   1.6 per cent so that you're looking at, in that 

          2   favourable combination, an increase to your debt ratio 

          3   of 1.4 per cent.  And we believe that would be better 

          4   if you were to add favourable flows to that.  

          5          Over on the rate side, adding those two factors 

          6   together, you're looking at $241 million in 2002 

          7   dollars to rate payers which is in excess of $30 

          8   million a year ongoing in terms of potential rate 

          9   savings. 

         10          So in conclusion, having done the financial 

         11   analysis from a Manitoba Hydro perspective, we've come 

         12   to the conclusion and feel confident that there will 

         13   be no adverse effects on Manitoba Hydro's financial 

         14   stability as a result of investing in Wuskwatim and 

         15   advancing it.  The impacts in the debt ratio net 

         16   income are very modest as you've seen.  It won't as a 

         17   consequence cause any additional rate increases.  

         18          There is some significant potential for 

         19   improved financial performance going forward once 

         20   those few early years, we've got over that and/or 

         21   there could be rate savings beginning as early as six 

         22   years after the project start-up and continuing 

         23   thereafter every year.  

         24          Mr. Chair, this concludes the end fact part of 

         25   the presentation.  




                                                                      169



          1          MR. WOJCZYNSKI:  There's just one last comment 

          2   I wanted to make.  I realize with the question that 

          3   Mr. Sargeant posed to me, there may be a 

          4   misunderstanding or I may have put forward an 

          5   explanation in the 450 megawatts in a way that might 

          6   lead you think that the cost of the wind and IRR is 

          7   worse than it might otherwise be than if we used 200 

          8   megawatts.  If we had done exactly the same kind of 

          9   analysis for 200 megawatts of wind even though it had 

         10   much less energy than Wuskwatim but the same capacity, 

         11   we would have had more or less the same kind of 

         12   result.  

         13          So the fact that we used 450 megawatt wind 

         14   facility did not significantly alter the IRR.  That 

         15   was not the reason why the IRR is so much lower than 

         16   the Wuskwatim one.  In case there was a misimpression 

         17   from what I was saying.  

         18          MR. SARGEANT:  No.  Thank you, Mr. Wojczynski.  

         19   I understood what you were getting at.  That to get 

         20   the output from wind, you needed a higher input than, 

         21   if I can use non-technical terms, than for water.  

         22   Thank you.  

         23          MR. WOJCZYNSKI:  That concludes our end fact.  

         24   We do have the EIS presentation but, Mr. Chair, we're 

         25   at your hands but I have a hunch that you may want to 




                                                                      170



          1   have a bigger wind break.  

          2          THE CHAIRMAN:  You had a good hunch.  I think 

          3   it's about time we take it at this point in time.  If 

          4   we can take a 15 minute break.  

          5   

          6          (PROCEEDINGS RECESSED AT 2:43 P.M. AND

          7           RECONVENED AT 3:00 P.M.)

          8   

          9   

         10               MR. LECUYER:  We might be fewer in

         11   numbers to get it started, but hopefully others

         12   will show up in a moment.  The ones that want to

         13   hear you are here.  So, take it away.

         14               MR. THOMAS:  Thank you, Mr. Chairman.

         15   The people that are going to be doing the

         16   Environmental Impact Assessment Statement are here

         17   with me, beside me.  Cam Osler, he is with

         18   InterGroup.  George Rempel is with TetrES.  Stuart

         19   Davies is with North/South Consultants and Dave

         20   Hicks is with N.D. Lea.  Of course, I am with

         21   Chief and Council of the Nisichawayasihk Cree

         22   Nation.

         23          Prior to the actual presentation on the

         24     screen, I would just like to make some comments

         25     that I would like to have included as part of




                                                                      171



          1     the record.

          2          Our lands and waters and resources are an

          3     integral part of who we are as Nisichawayasihk

          4     Cree Nation people.  Over many years we have

          5     lived in harmony with our environment and

          6     adapted to changing situations.  This has given

          7     us the ability to survive and thrive in the

          8     rugged wilderness of Northern Manitoba.  Our

          9     greatest challenge has been to adapt to the

         10     rapidly changing world of the twentieth and

         11     twenty-first centuries.  Today we are

         12     searching ways to integrate modern ways,

         13     technologies and opportunities into our society

         14     while preserving our identity and our

         15     traditional way of life that we value so

         16     highly.

         17          Wuskwatim represents just such an

         18     opportunity, but based on our past experience

         19     with the Churchill River Diversion project,

         20     which disrupted our traditional lifestyles, we

         21     have been naturally cautious about proceeding

         22     with Wuskwatim.  Our key priority has been to

         23     ensure that any development has minimal impact

         24     on our land and waters, while maximizing

         25     benefits.




                                                                      172



          1          One way to do this is to integrate our

          2     traditional knowledge into the assessment

          3     process, and we have been able to do that.  A

          4     landmark of the Environmental Impact Assessment

          5     process for Wuskwatim has been the use of local

          6     and traditional knowledge for the first time in

          7     assessing the impact of a hydroelectric

          8     generating and transmission project in

          9     Manitoba.  This information was in addition to

         10     the scientific information that is usually at

         11     the core of the environmental impact

         12     statements.

         13          As part of the process, NCN members shared

         14     their local area traditional knowledge through

         15     their own traditional knowledge program.  This

         16     program includes interviews with resource

         17     harvesters, elders, and others.  Traditional

         18     knowledge was also shared by the many NCN

         19     members who worked with study scientists in the

         20     field, programs that considered the physical

         21     land and water resources, heritage resources,

         22     and people in the local area that could

         23     potentially be affected by the project.

         24          In addition, we took into consideration

         25     some the sacred sites that we have on our




                                                                      173



          1     traditional territory and ensured that there

          2     was not going to be any impact on those sacred

          3     sites.

          4          All the studies were reviewed with NCN

          5     through the future development team and several

          6     community open houses.  They were also shared

          7     with other communities.

          8          Using traditional knowledge provides

          9     significant advantages.  First, it draws on the

         10     intimate knowledge of our land and resources by

         11     our own people, who were able to provide

         12     long-term and detailed information that may be

         13     missed by shorter term scientific studies.

         14          Second, it allows us to be part of a

         15     decision-making process in ensuring that the

         16     project will have as small an impact as

         17     possible.  A good example is the route of the

         18     proposed access road to the Wuskwatim site.

         19     Traditional knowledge played a role in assuring

         20     that sensitive sights were bypassed.

         21          Thirdly, when our own people see that

         22     their knowledge and wisdom is respected and

         23     used, they will be much more confident in and

         24     satisfied with the final result, and hence be

         25     supportive of the Wuskwatim project.  They are




                                                                      174



          1     part of the solution.

          2          Traditional knowledge is essential to our

          3     people.  While there are many different

          4     definitions, we have our own view of what

          5     traditional knowledge is and how it should be

          6     collected and used.  To us traditional

          7     knowledge is, but it is not limited to, the

          8     observation and experience of the land,

          9     Aboriginal law regarding how the environment

         10     works, the understanding of NCN's place in the

         11     world, how things are connected, including

         12     spirituality and relationship to the land, the

         13     goals and aspirations of NCN, the outlook on

         14     the proposed projects, concerns that we may

         15     have, and the acceptability of the projects to

         16     us, NCN's identity and culture, the stewardship

         17     of the land, a base for natural resource

         18     management.

         19          We feel that traditional knowledge comes

         20     from elders and others that are both

         21     traditional and also living in a modern way of

         22     life.  We have applied our traditional

         23     knowledge to the Wuskwatim project throughout

         24     the whole process of planning for the project,

         25     assessing the environmental effects that it may




                                                                      175



          1     have, and drawing conclusions that you have

          2     seen in the EIS documents.

          3          Our extensive involvement in the project

          4     has meant that traditional knowledge has played

          5     an important role in defining the project as is

          6     currently proposed and how those effects will

          7     be managed and monitored.  Traditional

          8     knowledge has played many essential roles in

          9     planning for the project and in carrying out

         10     the environmental studies.

         11               Selecting the low head design that

         12   will cause less than one half square kilometer of

         13   flooding and reduce effects on the environment

         14   compared to high head options.

         15               Also for selecting locations for the

         16   road, the camp, and transmission lines within our

         17   resource management area that will minimize

         18   effects on the environment and on NCN.

         19               Providing an understanding at the

         20   beginning of the environmental assessment process

         21   of what should be studied.  This was important in

         22   setting the scope of the assessment and guided the

         23   studies that were done.

         24          Adding in a major way to the understanding

         25     of the baseline conditions.  In other words,




                                                                      176



          1     how things were in the past, how they are

          2     today, and how they may change in the future

          3     without the project.  This includes

          4     understanding things that have affected us and

          5     our environment over time from the Natural

          6     Resource Transfer Act through to the Churchill

          7     River Diversion project.

          8          Selecting valued environmental components

          9     for detailed study, such as Woodland caribou,

         10     and helping with an understanding of how those

         11     VEC's are connected to the whole environment.

         12          Contributing, along with science, to

         13     conclusions about the effects that the project

         14     may have.  Where results did not agree, both

         15     were included in the EIS reports.

         16          Helping to identify things that should be

         17     done to manage effects; for example, the need

         18     for ceremonies at the Wuskwatim site before any

         19     changes begin.

         20          Helping to monitor where monitoring will

         21     be needed.  For example, monitoring water

         22     levels at Wuskwatim lake in the vicinity of

         23     important cultural sites.

         24          Along with Manitoba Hydro, we have also

         25     learned about the concerns and ideas of other




                                                                      177



          1     Aboriginal communities through the public

          2     involvement program that has been implemented

          3     since the fall of 2001.  Concerns raised by

          4     others through this process were included in

          5     the assessment process.  For example, in

          6     response to concerns raised by a trapper in the

          7     Wabowden register trapline district, Manitoba

          8     Hydro examined whether an underground river

          9     could link Wuskwatim Lake, or more broadly to

         10     the Churchill River Diversion system, with the

         11     headwaters of Ferguson Creek and therefore be

         12     responsible for increased water levels on

         13     Ferguson Creek at times.

         14          Also, TCN's concerns led to commitment to

         15     extend long-term quality monitoring from

         16     Birchtree Lake to Stephens Lake.

         17          So, we have made sure that because of our

         18     involvement as NCN people that the

         19     Environmental Impact Assessment that has been

         20     done includes our traditional knowledge, as

         21     well as western scientific knowledge components

         22     to the whole thing.

         23          So with that having been read into the

         24     record, Mr. Chairman, I would like to then hand

         25     over to Cam Osler who will do some of the




                                                                      178



          1     presentations, and each one of my environmental

          2     team here will do their portion of the

          3     presentation.  Thank you.

          4               Cam.

          5               MR. OSLER:  Okay.  I will deal with the review of

          6   the Environmental Impact Statements, documents

          7   submitted for review by this Commission.

          8          This work was put together by a team of

          9     people who worked jointly for both NCN and

         10     Manitoba Hydro, and they will speak to you on

         11     the different parts of it today.

         12          The integrated approach is the first part

         13     I will deal with, looking at the overall

         14     integrated approach adopted for this

         15     assessment.  There will be a second part that

         16     will follow that and will look at each one of

         17     the environmental components, parts of the

         18     environment that were looked at as part of this

         19     process of doing this assessment.

         20          When I am looking at the integrated

         21     approach, I will focus on certain topics; the

         22     regulatory review process itself, the

         23     assessment approach taken in general, the

         24     public consultation and involvement approach,

         25     and the overview of the EIS studies in general.




                                                                      179



          1     I will focus in the end on some cumulative

          2     effects issues because they have surfaced in

          3     the question and answer process and they are

          4     common issues to all of the assessments that

          5     will be discussed.

          6          Starting with the regulatory review

          7     process, it is ongoing and cooperative between

          8     the two governments, Manitoba and Canada, as

          9     Mr. Strachan pointed out earlier today.  The

         10     Wuskwatim project requires Federal and

         11     Provincial regulatory environmental approvals.

         12     The generation and transmission projects are

         13     viewed in these processes as two separate

         14     projects for licensing applications and review.

         15     The regulatory and the public review has

         16     continued since the EIS filings were made in

         17     April of 2003, and extends beyond the CEC

         18     hearing process itself.

         19          Now, the CEC knows it has continued since

         20     the filings, because you have had processes

         21     involving motions hearings and interrogatories

         22     processes of the CEC.  As noted earlier today,

         23     the Provincial government and Federal

         24     government PAT and TAC process had their own

         25     reviews, their own supplementary filing




                                                                      180



          1     questions to us, two rounds of them, and

          2     filings in response to them.

          3          The Department of Fisheries and Oceans in

          4     the Federal process has an entirely separate

          5     process of making its own decisions from the

          6     Province of Manitoba, required under the

          7     Canadian Environmental Assessment Act and the

          8     Fisheries Act.  And that is proceeding with

          9     documentation.  A large part of the draft

         10     documentation was filed in public registries

         11     recently and put on the website and made aware

         12     to all the participants in this hearing as of

         13     Friday.

         14          There is another process that has been

         15     going on that people have heard from, it is

         16     Federal and Provincial Aboriginal consultations

         17     that is going onwards as we sit in this

         18     process.  And there will be other processes

         19     even after the licencing in terms of monitoring

         20     and review as these projects proceed, if they

         21     are indeed licensed.

         22          The focus today, going to the next slide,

         23     is on the Environmental Impact Statements that

         24     have been filed with you, and all of the

         25     supplementary information relating to them.




                                                                      181



          1     These have been prepared in accordance with the

          2     EIS guidelines provided to the proponents.

          3     These EIS guidelines set out the information

          4     that is required by the Federal and Provincial

          5     government agencies.

          6          The project description and refinement is

          7     the first key piece of information that this

          8     requirement sets out.  Now, we use the word

          9     "refinement" here, because project description,

         10     when you start and make an application for a

         11     project as was done in 2001, you have a certain

         12     level of project description, but that is going

         13     to keep evolving.  It evolved and is refined in

         14     the case of what we have heard today with the

         15     selecting of an access road route, with the

         16     selecting of transmission routes that were put

         17     before you.

         18          By the time the application was made, the

         19     low head approach had already been selected by

         20     the proponents, as distinct from the high head

         21     approach, but there has been refinements to

         22     that process since then.  There has been

         23     refinements in terms of how the project will be

         24     operated and everything else like that.

         25          So, this process is ongoing.  It will




                                                                      182



          1     continue to be refined in response to

          2     monitoring even as the project is developed in

          3     some instances, as you hear from people as you

          4     listen to all the evidence.

          5          The assessments by each environmental

          6     component -- and I am going to talk about what

          7     I mean by that word -- include a series of

          8     things.  They include looking at what is the

          9     existing setting or baseline; they include

         10     looking at effects assessment on the

         11     environment and on the socioeconomic

         12     situations.  They look at mitigation to

         13     mitigate effects from these projects.  They

         14     look at something called cumulative effects and

         15     residual effects.  And they look at ongoing

         16     environmental monitoring after it is all

         17     finished.  But they do all of these things for

         18     each what we call environmental components; the

         19     physical environment, the aquatic environment,

         20     the terrestrial environment, and socioeconomic,

         21     or in layman's language, people environment,

         22     and heritage resources.  These are spelled out

         23     in each of the EIS guidelines as the five

         24     components that have got to be examined

         25     separately as part of the assessment process.




                                                                      183



          1          Today my colleagues will address, we will

          2     address together each of the key areas that I

          3     have just listed here and the key conclusions

          4     in each one of them.

          5          The overall assessment approach -- sorry,

          6     all the way through all of them, they have

          7     involved public consultation and involvement.

          8     The assessment process is not just done by a

          9     bunch of people working for some proponents.

         10     They go out and they talk with people, and I am

         11     going to talk a bit about that process.  It

         12     occurs all the way through the process of

         13     looking at what are the issues to be examined,

         14     what are the assessment findings, what are the

         15     monitoring and mitigation approaches, what is

         16     the refinements to the project that seem to

         17     make sense?  All these things involve an

         18     ongoing process of dialogue.

         19          Let's go on to the next one.  The

         20     assessment that has been put in front of you in

         21     accordance with the guidelines incorporates

         22     local and traditional knowledge as well as

         23     scientific information, as Councillor Elvis

         24     Thomas has just laid out for you.  The local

         25     and traditional knowledge was an essential part




                                                                      184



          1     of the planning and the environmental

          2     assessment process and I want to say a few

          3     words about that.

          4          Traditional knowledge has been explained

          5     to you in the hearings and the meetings in 2002

          6     on the guidelines, and explained again today by

          7     Mr. Thomas on the grounds of NCN's perspective.

          8     And he has reminded us all that there are

          9     different perspectives from different people

         10     and he has given you the NCN perspective that

         11     is set out in the way in which we have

         12     conducted this assessment.

         13          Essentially, when we listen to people, one

         14     of the first things that it involves is an

         15     attitude of respect by those doing the work to

         16     the local and traditional views and knowledge

         17     of the people in the areas that are going to be

         18     potentially affected.  This respect deals not

         19     just with hard knowledge the way some of us

         20     understand it -- where are the caribou, where

         21     are the fish -- it also deals with people's

         22     view of the world, their spirituality, how they

         23     see relationships between and among themselves

         24     and the environment, and the elements of the

         25     environment, the things they value and things




                                                                      185



          1     they want to see protected, all of these

          2     things.  It isn't just traditional.  Some of us

          3     just listen to this discussion and we think it

          4     has to be something that has been there for

          5     generations only.  If you listen to the NCN

          6     perspective, it includes modern as well as

          7     traditional.  It includes their views today as

          8     they have been informed and learned from

          9     Churchill River Diversion, as well as their

         10     views before they ever saw anybody up there

         11     trying to change the environment for them.

         12          So all of these perspectives are important

         13     to keep in mind when we are thinking of

         14     traditional knowledge, and not just for

         15     listening to NCN but all the other First

         16     Nations and Aboriginal peoples that these

         17     projects have discussed issues with.

         18          In the case of NCN, information was shared

         19     from the very outset.  Dialogue went on from

         20     the very outset.  The attitude of the respect

         21     is demonstrated by the approach that the

         22     parties have taken.  Councillor Thomas has

         23     mentioned their own traditional interview

         24     study, the scoping of the projects, the design

         25     of the projects, the refinements of the




                                                                      186



          1     projects, the actual people from NCN worked

          2     with the study scientists in collecting the

          3     information and sharing information there.

          4     There are many, many different ways in which

          5     the people of NCN for many, many years now have

          6     been working with all of us to develop what you

          7     see in front of you today.

          8          Beyond the people of NCN, information was

          9     provided by others.  Ongoing public

         10     consultation and involvement activities

         11     occurred beyond NCN starting in 2001, and it

         12     occurred with First Nations and the Aboriginal

         13     peoples in the areas that could potentially be

         14     affected by these projects.  We took the

         15     attitude potentially to be very broad.  Without

         16     trying to say for sure this would be a

         17     potential effect, we talked about anybody

         18     upstream, downstream, or in any way in a

         19     contractual agreement relationship with

         20     Manitoba Hydro that might perceive themselves

         21     to have some possibility of being affected.

         22          There have also been discussions with

         23     local governments throughout this area, with

         24     the potentially affected stakeholders such as

         25     trappers and other resource users, and with the




                                                                      187



          1     general public.  All of this has been very

          2     important to the development, refinement, and

          3     ongoing assessment process for these projects.

          4          The EIS documents there before you today

          5     detail over four years of research and public

          6     review.  The environmental studies for both

          7     projects have been underway since late 1999, in

          8     the case of some of the studies, have been

          9     under way since 1998.

         10          The EIS describes the refinement of the

         11     projects that have been going on throughout

         12     this time period to avoid and mitigate expected

         13     construction and operation effects.

         14          The table of contents volume, which is

         15     separate volume all by itself -- courtesy of

         16     some interveners who suggested to us that it

         17     would be useful to develop such a volume --

         18     this table of contents volume outlines the EIS

         19     reports filed in April of 2003.  First of all

         20     there is a brief summary, public summary

         21     document, which we call the integrated

         22     executive summary of the EIS's for the two

         23     separate projects, the generation project and

         24     the transmission project.  That is not a long

         25     document, it is not that hard to read, and it




                                                                      188



          1     was intended for the general public.  A Cree

          2     translation and an oral translation was done by

          3     the elders and other people from NCN, a team of

          4     them, so there was a Power Point presentation

          5     developed, a disk prepared and was available to

          6     anybody who was interested in hearing the oral

          7     presentation of that executive summary.

          8          The main technical volumes, one for each

          9     of the two projects, there is one volume which

         10     contains most of the information that we

         11     thought would be necessary for the review by

         12     the regulators, including the CEC.  That is

         13     intended to summarize all of the key elements

         14     of the assessment process that the guidelines

         15     required us to do, and put it in one document,

         16     although it is a bigger document, several 100

         17     pages in each case.

         18          There are a series of supporting documents

         19     that start to take up the numbers of feet that

         20     Mr. Wojczynski was talking about as

         21     documentation.  These are viewed by us as

         22     extensive technical, scientific, or other

         23     information, that support the main document.

         24     We don't expect everybody to read every single

         25     one of these volumes.  They are there for




                                                                      189



          1     professionals, for people that are interested

          2     in particular technical areas, to know what the

          3     details are.  But the main public summaries for

          4     the public and the main volumes, one for the

          5     each two projects, are the ones where most of

          6     the information that should be relevant to the

          7     guidelines is contained.

          8          There has been extensive supplementary

          9     materials filed since the filings in April of

         10     2003.  These have generally responded to

         11     questions posed by government regulators, or

         12     the public, or participants in the CEC process.

         13     These documents include supplementary filings

         14     made to the Technical Advisory Committee in

         15     August and October of last year.  They include

         16     the two rounds of public questions posed

         17     through this process with the CEC.

         18          All of this documentation today is -- when

         19     we talk about the EIS, we are really talking

         20     not just what we filed in April, but all the

         21     documents that have been filed to date, all of

         22     them are before the Commission today.  This is,

         23     for our purposes today, the EIS.

         24          The public consultation and involvement

         25     process itself was an integral part of the




                                                                      190



          1     overall planning and assessment process.  Since

          2     1997, NCN has been actively working and

          3     involved with Manitoba Hydro in all aspects of

          4     planning, and you have heard that, not just the

          5     generation project but also the transmission

          6     project in the areas where it falls within

          7     their traditional territory.

          8          Since 2001 we have had five separate

          9     rounds of public consultation and involvement

         10     beyond NCN, extensive opportunities for the

         11     public to receive information and provide

         12     input.  In fact, the public involvement plan

         13     that we filed with the regulators, I think in

         14     the summer of 2002, set out the objective of

         15     trying to provide early and ongoing information

         16     to people and to receive information back from

         17     people as to their views and concerns.  The

         18     focus of the involvement process has been on

         19     meaningful consultation with Aboriginal

         20     peoples, First Nations and Aboriginal peoples,

         21     but also with all the other people that might

         22     have any potential -- that might be potentially

         23     affected by these projects as well as the

         24     general public.

         25          The website information, the open houses,




                                                                      191



          1     the community meetings and the newsletters were

          2     used as methods to try and facilitate these

          3     objectives.  A very special step we took was in

          4     July of this year, we had a participant

          5     workshop with the various people who were

          6     looking as though they were going to be

          7     interested in being participants in this

          8     hearing, in order to give them three days to

          9     get an overview -- or two days for the EIS and

         10     one day for the need for -- to get an overview

         11     of what all of this documentation was and get a

         12     leg up on it.

         13          We have learned from this public input, it

         14     has helped refine and improve the projects and

         15     the assessments.  I will give you a few

         16     examples -- Councillor Thomas has given some of

         17     these already --

         18          NCN participation in the evaluation and

         19     selection of the road, camp, and transmission

         20     line locations in their area, and the key

         21     choices about design and other matters related

         22     to the developments, these have been obviously

         23     critical to the evolution and refinement

         24     process.

         25          Elected officials in all of the




                                                                      192



          1     communities in the region that would talk with

          2     us have made inputs to the design of the public

          3     involvement plan at an early stage.  That was

          4     the first stage of the discussion we had with

          5     them.  We dealt with them as they wanted to be

          6     dealt with in terms of how the process should

          7     unfold.

          8          Downstream communities in particular who

          9     were concerned that maybe there might be some

         10     water quality issues flowing downstream to them

         11     had an effect on the field work design that had

         12     been carried out in terms of water quality

         13     sampling.  And that can be spoken to if anybody

         14     is interested.

         15          Communities, since we have been doing all

         16     this filing and having these discussions, some

         17     of them have raised questions about further

         18     information on systems operations issues,

         19     potential for water regime changes that David

         20     Cormie presented earlier.  That presentation,

         21     that process of going more in-depth was in

         22     response to the public in various areas raising

         23     questions and concerns and looking for more

         24     information.

         25          Communities and other's inputs to the




                                                                      193



          1     identification and evaluation of alternative

          2     transmission line routes and the selection of

          3     the preferred transmission routes.  The whole

          4     transmission process in a sense is separate

          5     from generation.  Generation, at least they

          6     start off knowing where the site is.  They may

          7     not know whether they want to have a high head

          8     or a low head, or whether they want to operate

          9     it this way or that way.  Transmission says

         10     they have to get from here to there, but there

         11     is a lot of different ways they can do that.

         12     And a lot of their work that they have been

         13     doing for the last few years has been assessing

         14     alternatives, looking at alternatives, talking

         15     to people about what the concerns should be,

         16     what they would like to see happen, what they

         17     would want to make sure is avoided.

         18          When we look beyond the process and start

         19     talking about the outcomes, it is important to

         20     understand that the environmental effects were

         21     predicted specific to Wuskwatim projects that

         22     we are talking about today.  That is the whole

         23     focus of the EIA and EIS assessments,

         24     Environmental Impact Assessments.  So I want to

         25     look at this rather carefully.




                                                                      194



          1          The potential effects that we are talking

          2     about from each project, or of each project,

          3     are predicted separately for the projects, and

          4     are predicted separately in the end for each

          5     environmental component that I have talked

          6     about earlier; the physical environment, the

          7     aquatic, et cetera.  They are done in each case

          8     by comparing two things; first, what would be

          9     expected without the projects, which we have

         10     talked about as the existing setting or then

         11     existing baseline without the projects.  And we

         12     compare that with, of course, what do we expect

         13     to happen with the projects?  And we talk about

         14     effects pathways.

         15          Now, an effects pathway is a very simple

         16     idea.  We do something with this project that

         17     changes the water regime which you have heard

         18     described.  What might that do to the land

         19     around, and the air around, and the waters?

         20     The land might have more or less erosion.  If

         21     there is more erosion it might put more

         22     sediment into the water.  That sediment may

         23     have an effect on water quality for human

         24     beings consuming the water, it may have an

         25     effect on fish and fish habitat.  The erosion




                                                                      195



          1     process may have more trees that are valued in

          2     that area falling into the waters, which may

          3     affect the terrestrial habitat.  The

          4     development of the road may bring more people

          5     to this area than otherwise had been the case,

          6     which some people may view as creating some

          7     opportunities, some other people may view it as

          8     creating some issues.

          9          Each one of these elements of the project,

         10     the construction process, the changing of the

         11     water regime, the development of a road, the

         12     development of transmission, creates beginnings

         13     of pathways through to the air, the land and

         14     the water, and ultimately the people.  Our job

         15     is to try and understand those pathways.  And

         16     the end point that we talk about in each case

         17     is something called a valued environmental

         18     component or a valued ecosystem component --

         19     fancy word for saying somebody thinks that is

         20     important, it is a resource use, it is an

         21     element of the environment that is important.

         22          For starters, the regulators have told us

         23     that each one of those environmental components

         24     are important and we better look at each one of

         25     those.  But within each one of those components




                                                                      196



          1     there are things that some people particularly

          2     want us to focus on, and we call those valued

          3     environmental components or valued eco-system

          4     components.  And we are trying to find out

          5     where the project is going to have a pathway

          6     through to effect on those components.  And we

          7     are trying to do that by comparing what that

          8     component will be like without the project

          9     versus what it will be with the project.

         10          In a sense, just to be very clear, there

         11     are not only direct effects, but a lot of

         12     indirect effects involved in the pathways that

         13     we are examining.  And to be very clear, in

         14     case there is any confusion, we are not limited

         15     in the way in which the guidelines have told us

         16     to look at this by the Canadian Environmental

         17     Assessment Act.  The Canadian Environmental

         18     Assessment Act only looks at some pathways as a

         19     matter of law.  We have to look at all of them.

         20     We look at the effects on human beings through

         21     jobs, and not just through the pathways through

         22     the physical and bio-physical environments.

         23          When all is said and done, we are talking

         24     about residual effects, the end result after we

         25     have talked about mitigation, and their




                                                                      197



          1     significance.  That is what the end result is,

          2     that is the end product.  Is there going to be

          3     a likely effect on valued environmental

          4     component as a result of a pathway of effects

          5     from this project, direct and indirect?  Is it

          6     likely to be -- is it likely, particularly if

          7     it is going to be adverse, and is it going to

          8     be significant?  And significant is a

          9     terminology that is used with factors built in

         10     that are explained in the reports, but they

         11     look at the frequency, they look at the

         12     magnitude, they look at the geographical

         13     extent, various factors such as that.  They

         14     decide whether or not, based on judgment and

         15     based on information, or based on if there are

         16     threshold guidelines, which there are in some

         17     cases, whether it is likely to be a significant

         18     change.

         19          In looking at all of this, we look at

         20     mitigation, we look at monitoring, we look at

         21     follow-up measures.  They are all important.

         22     Monitoring in this case is looking at either

         23     trying to deal with uncertainties and find out

         24     what happens in fact, or to deal with

         25     confirming what we have predicted, or as part




                                                                      198



          1     of an adaptive management strategy to manage

          2     the results that occur rather than sitting here

          3     debating at great length what the most expected

          4     ones are going to be.

          5          So that sets the framework in which we are

          6     working, and it gives us the focus, and it is

          7     going to be there for each one of the

          8     environmental components that we are going to

          9     talk about.

         10          There is one big issue everybody has asked

         11     us a lot of questions about, that is cumulative

         12     effects.  So I am going to spend a few moments

         13     concluding my comments by looking at that.

         14          Cumulative effects assessment was an

         15     integral part of the overall effects assessment

         16     as directed that it should be by the

         17     guidelines, it shall be.  So cumulative effects

         18     assessment, or CEA, was an approach used for

         19     both projects as required in the guidelines.

         20     The approach we took reflected the EIS

         21     guidelines.  We looked at all effects that are

         22     likely to result from the Wuskwatim projects,

         23     when they are anticipated to occur, in

         24     combination with other projects or activities

         25     that have been or will be carried out -- words




                                                                      199



          1     right out of the guidelines and words right out

          2     of section 16 of the Canadian Environmental

          3     Assessment Act.

          4          There will be -- I am going to dwell on

          5     for one second  the words "will be."  Quite

          6     legitimately in some cases people would assume

          7     that means they have to be for sure.  Well,

          8     Canadian practitioner's guide and other things,

          9     have an evolved thinking on this.  It isn't

         10     just those projects that are already licensed,

         11     it is at least the projects that are already

         12     licensed and those for which the licences have

         13     been made, applications have been made is sort

         14     of the basic requirement.  We have adopted the

         15     approach as saying, and are reasonably likely

         16     to occur within a certain time period, and I

         17     will talk about that.  Hypothetical projects,

         18     though, are outside the bounds clearly of the

         19     concept of saying something will be carried

         20     out.

         21          The approach that we have taken in

         22     accordance with the guidelines is intended to

         23     meet the single project regulatory assessment

         24     requirements as reviewed by the Technical

         25     Advisory Committee and Project Administration




                                                                      200



          1     Team.  That's our focus, that is our direction.

          2     This differs, I have to note, and it is laid

          3     out in some of the interrogatories we received

          4     from the CEC, in particular number 137.  This

          5     differs from broader regional planning

          6     approaches or cumulative effects assessment.

          7     When you are focused on how to assist doing an

          8     environmental assessment to get the effects --

          9     as I have just talked about a few minutes

         10     ago -- assessed, you are focused on project and

         11     the changes it will make to the environment.

         12          There is another approach that can be

         13     taken under other mandates to talk about a

         14     region and to talk about planning for that

         15     region, and to talk about cumulative effects of

         16     all the different developments that may take

         17     place in the region, and the different

         18     approaches to be taken.  That usually requires

         19     a mandated authority with a regional

         20     jurisdiction to look at such things.  That's

         21     not what we are doing, to be very clear.

         22     Inside the areas we are talking about, there

         23     are mandated authorities, Federal, Provincial,

         24     and Aboriginal, First Nations that look at some

         25     of these areas, including the Nelson House




                                                                      201



          1     Resource Management Board and the Cormorant

          2     Resource Management Board.  So there are bodies

          3     that do look at regional issues within certain

          4     areas.  But we didn't take that approach.  That

          5     doesn't mean we ignored regional issues, it

          6     just means that our focus was on the single

          7     project regulatory assessment requirements as

          8     set out to us in the guidelines.

          9          I would just note that the approach we

         10     have taken, and this is set out in the answers

         11     to questions, is consistent with the Canadian

         12     Environmental Assessment Agencies

         13     Practitioner's Guide.  The CEA -- as said in

         14     that guide and as the view we have taken -- is

         15     an Environmental Impact Assessment done well.

         16     Essentially, it is not something magical, it is

         17     not something unique and special, it is

         18     something integral, and it is basically doing

         19     environmental assessment properly and well,

         20     taking into account how the environment may be

         21     changing due to past, current, and future

         22     projects that we are reasonably certain will be

         23     carried out.

         24          The CEA approach is integrated throughout

         25     each EIS for each environmental component.  It




                                                                      202



          1     is done for the transmission as well as for the

          2     generation, and for each one of the components

          3     therein.  It considers local and traditional

          4     knowledge throughout.

          5          To deal with a couple of very specific

          6     points, to conclude, two slides:  Cumulative

          7     effects were assessed with regard to past and

          8     current project activities as required by the

          9     guidelines.

         10          Past and current project activities were

         11     considered to form an integral part of the

         12     existing or baseline or setting environments.

         13     We considered current and ongoing effects, for

         14     example, of the Churchill River Diversion,

         15     including the augmented flow program, as well

         16     as other specified projects and activities.

         17     The assessment separately was done for each

         18     environmental component, and where it was

         19     considered relevant for that component to think

         20     about the Churchill River Diversion, it was

         21     thought about.  I point to various areas where

         22     you will see this surface.  When we are looking

         23     at the physical environment, it surfaces in

         24     looking at the where are we on the erosion

         25     spectrum with respect to the CRD?  Are we early




                                                                      203



          1     days, middle days, late days, in terms of

          2     erosion effects, sediment effects, mercury

          3     effects?  People did not put on blinkers and

          4     not ask themselves those questions, how is that

          5     baseline evolving?

          6          When we are dealing with socioeconomics,

          7     you cannot work in this area without hearing

          8     from the people in that area the effects on

          9     them of the CRD and the LWR, what it did to

         10     shatter their confidence and raise their

         11     anxiety about any future hydro development.

         12          So although we talk about the baseline

         13     taking into account the CRD and where we are

         14     today, where it is relevant, we have to take

         15     into account because we are forced to, the

         16     situation of how that baseline is evolving.

         17          The scoping for each environment was based

         18     on the potential for overlapping pathways.

         19     What does that mean?

         20          Section 2.3.2 of the guidelines lays out

         21     some ground rules for scoping in terms of

         22     geography.  It talks about, you will look at

         23     the reflected local areas directly impacted by

         24     the project, the area right around the dam, the

         25     area where you have a right-of-way for




                                                                      204



          1     transmission, for example.  Obviously, you have

          2     got to look at that.  But it also says you have

          3     got to look at the zones within which there may

          4     be regional or global effects from these

          5     projects -- zones meaning what?  If you are

          6     going to affect some caribou and they range

          7     over a much bigger range, then you better take

          8     account of all of the things that are going on

          9     inside the areas where they are ranging, or you

         10     may miss something that will be critical to

         11     them.  If you're going to the air, you better

         12     think about that.  If the result of what you

         13     are doing will save emission somewhere else

         14     globally, you better think about that.

         15          We have certainly, as you have heard and

         16     you will hear, have been thinking about those

         17     types of things with respect to the pathways of

         18     effects from these projects.  The secret is, we

         19     have to look at the pathways of effects in each

         20     one of the environments from these projects,

         21     and then consider whether other projects such

         22     as CRD, or LWR, or forest reactivity, or other

         23     things that are going on, overlap with these

         24     effects pathways.  And if so, we have to think

         25     about what is the issue and how does it change




                                                                      205



          1     our baseline and the future of the effects?

          2          Essentially, it also means that where

          3     there are no overlaps, we are not looking.  We

          4     don't go and study everything.  If there is no

          5     effect downstream on the Churchill River, we

          6     are not looking there.  The critical

          7     assumption, the critical point, is there a

          8     reasonable basis for belief and critical

          9     evidence to support that key assumption as to

         10     where we looked and where we didn't look?  That

         11     will get tested in the process of this hearing.

         12     That is the past and the current projects.

         13          Looking at the future projects, cumulative

         14     effects were assessed with regard to specific

         15     future projects.  I would say that in the EIS

         16     in the general approach we do lay out the

         17     specific past projects that we had in mind,

         18     just so there is a checklist.  In section of

         19     for example, the generation project, a

         20     checklist of all the past projects we had in

         21     mind, so that you can know what we had in our

         22     mind when we were thinking about what I just

         23     talked about, beyond the CRD.

         24          We did the same thing with respect to the

         25     future projects we had in mind.  They are all




                                                                      206



          1     listed there, but just to summarize it.  When

          2     we are looking at future projects or

          3     activities, they have to be scoped into the

          4     cumulative effects assessment to deal with the

          5     "will be carried element" that I was talking

          6     about.  As a practical ground rule, we included

          7     projects being considered as reasonably likely

          8     to occur, by Manitoba Hydro, for the possible

          9     construction starting within the next five to

         10     ten years.  We also looked at other specific

         11     activities, the forestry area, et cetera.

         12          Now, we think that that is consistent with

         13     good practice, best practice.  Elsewhere we

         14     have answered some questions, I think the PCN

         15     in the second round, to document that, as well

         16     as earlier on to the TAC questions in the

         17     supplementary filings.

         18          The assessment was done again separately

         19     for each environmental component, and I will

         20     give you some examples.

         21          When we go to the scoping, generation

         22     project scoping for each environment is based

         23     again on the potential overlapping pathways.

         24     Again, we are talking about the same ground

         25     rule I just used a few minutes ago.  But here,




                                                                      207



          1     let's apply it to the future.  In the

          2     bio-physical study area, for example, we are

          3     talking about an area from the foot of Early

          4     Morning Rapids down through Opegano Lake as a

          5     bio-physical area that might be affected by

          6     water regime changes due to this project.  We

          7     looked at with Notigi, with Gull, or with

          8     Conawapa, three projects that Manitoba Hydro

          9     sees as reasonably likely they might start

         10     construction within the next five to ten years,

         11     would they have an overlapping effect with the

         12     effects of Wuskwatim projects?  The conclusions

         13     set out are, they don't think so and therefore

         14     these projects are not a part of any detailed

         15     cumulative effects assessment because we could

         16     not see an overlap.  But, again, that is open

         17     for discussion.  In the second round of

         18     questions from the CEC, there were some very

         19     specific questions about, well, why did you

         20     exclude Notigi for that reason -- CEC 103 if I

         21     am not mistaken.  So that is one example.

         22          When we go to socioeconomic study regions,

         23     the approach we took acknowledges that the

         24     effects of employment go far beyond the local

         25     area.  They include the people in the north,




                                                                      208



          1     certainly the people in the project region,

          2     that goes throughout all the area where

          3     preference for employment will be given.  We

          4     talked about a number of different regions in

          5     the socioeconomic assessment, particularly the

          6     generation project, to reflect that.  The

          7     transmission project,  we tended to focus more

          8     on the individual segments where the

          9     transmission lines were being built.

         10          Finally, when we were looking at what Dave

         11     Cormie was talking about this morning on system

         12     water regime, we looked at that in more detail

         13     after the EIS was filed in order to address

         14     issues being raised by people, we of course are

         15     looking at, okay, the whole CRD, the whole LWR

         16     are, are there any potentials for overlap of

         17     effects.

         18          You heard today that in the case of CRD

         19     there is no potential for overlap in the

         20     judgment of the information put in front of

         21     you.  Downstream in the Nelson River, Lower

         22     Nelson plants, there is no basis that we can

         23     understand proceeding any perceptible change in

         24     the water regime.  And dealing with the LWR

         25     releases, again, the information is, no




                                                                      209



          1     perceptible change seems to be reasonably

          2     expected.

          3          We tried to look at how this might be with

          4     the Gull and the Conawapa projects added in,

          5     Notigi didn't make any difference, but Gull and

          6     Conawapa might, but we could not come up with

          7     any likely scenarios to how Gull and Conawapa

          8     would be developed, including tie lines and

          9     everything else, and therefore make a

         10     reasonable basis for a likely prediction, which

         11     is required if you are going to do a cumulative

         12     assessment.  We are not just trying to talk

         13     about anything, we are trying to talk about

         14     what is likely to be an effect.  So we scoped

         15     out, for the purposes of the system water

         16     regime issues we talked about this morning, we

         17     ended up scoping out any attempt at assessing

         18     Gull and Conawapa for that reason.  There is no

         19     likely scenario.  We considered it, we looked

         20     at whether it could be used, and we came to the

         21     conclusion that there is no one scenario

         22     likely.

         23          I have given you that to set the stage for

         24     the discussion by components.  We will now go

         25     to the second part of our presentation dealing




                                                                      210



          1     with specific environments.  The studies

          2     extended to the siting and the refinement of

          3     project components and assessments of effects

          4     on the physical environment, the aquatic

          5     environment, terrestrial, and then the

          6     socioeconomic and heritage.  And George Rempel

          7     is going to start off by focusing on the

          8     physical environment, and then others will

          9     follow on the others ones.

         10               MR. REMPEL:  I will be talking about

         11   the physical environment components that were

         12   identified in the guidelines as needing to be

         13   addressed.  These components include, the

         14   following items:  Climate, geology, soils, water

         15   regime, ice processes, erosion, sedimentation and

         16   debris.

         17          These guidelines were for both the

         18     project -- the Wuskwatim Generation Project and

         19     the Transmission Project -- included these

         20     components.  Obviously, there was more

         21     discussion of some of them on the Generation

         22     side -- debris, for example -- than there was

         23     on the Transmission.

         24          Each of these components are assessed in

         25     great detail in the various documents that




                                                                      211



          1     Mr. Osler has described.

          2          Subsequent to their filing of the EIS,

          3     there actually was additional information on a

          4     number of topics, and rather than go through

          5     all these items in detail, I will make some

          6     comments on some of the topics that were raised

          7     in the interrogatory process.

          8          To begin with, in terms of climate, the

          9     Wuskwatim development overall will have a

         10     positive effect on climate.  The Generation

         11     project is expected to result in a net

         12     reduction in greenhouse gases.  That is

         13     particularly true because of the displacement

         14     of power that would otherwise be generated

         15     using coal or gas as explained by

         16     Mr. Wojczynski this morning.

         17          And also, it is also a fact because there

         18     will be minimal flooding because there will be

         19     such a small amount of new flooding associated

         20     with the Generation Project.

         21          The Transmission Line Project will result

         22     in clearing of the forest and vegetation along

         23     the right-of-way along different station

         24     sights.

         25          There will be a loss of carbon stocks.  We




                                                                      212



          1     have been very conservative in estimating the

          2     loss.  We have considered there would not be

          3     revegetation.  Obviously, there will be.  But,

          4     even when we look at it in a very conservative

          5     manner, the loss of carbon stocks, we believe,

          6     are very nominal in the overall regional

          7     context.

          8          So, overall, the climate effects are

          9     positive.

         10          In terms of water regime, we spent some

         11     time talking about this today, the effects of

         12     Wuskwatim Generation on the water regime are

         13     minor.  If you look at the upstream side of it,

         14     water levels will be raised between Taskinigup

         15     Falls and Wuskwatim Falls about 7 metres.

         16          In the immediate forebay, as we talked

         17     about before, the water levels that today

         18     annually vary, subject to the flows along the

         19     diversion out on Wuskwatim Lake, will be

         20     stabilized in the upper area of its present

         21     range.

         22          There will not be water regime changes

         23     upstream of Early Morning Rapids.  Those act as

         24     an hydraulic brake in the water profile.

         25          Looking downstream, there will be changes




                                                                      213



          1     downstream of the Generating Station,

          2     particularly immediately downstream of the

          3     station.  This is a function of when the

          4     various turbines are operating.

          5          If, for example, three turbines are

          6     running during the day and only two at night,

          7     there will be an immediate change in the water

          8     level downstream in the Burntwood River.

          9          So, these will be most pronounced in the

         10     first 9 kilometres or so downstream of the

         11     plant itself.  These variations are going to be

         12     up to about 1.3 metres per day and they will

         13     occur daily, I should say, under normal,

         14     open-water conditions.

         15          As you proceed further down to Opegano

         16     Lake, these will be dampened out.  By the time

         17     you get there, it will be about 0.45 metres and

         18     they will be further smoothed out as the water

         19     proceeds down the rapids and gets to Birch Tree

         20     Lake.  There, the water level changes will be

         21     not perceptible.  It will be about 0.1 metres;

         22     about four inches.

         23          So, we have got changes in the water

         24     regime essentially from Birch Tree Lake up to

         25     the foot of Early Morning Rapids.  Those are




                                                                      214



          1     the changes that are brought about by the

          2     station.

          3          The station will not change the operation

          4     of the Churchill River Diversion.  The

          5     Wuskwatim project will not affect the operation

          6     of Notigi, that is a controlled structure,

          7     regulating flows into the Rat/Burntwood, nor

          8     Missi Falls, which is the outlet -- that

          9     controls the flows into the Churchill River.

         10          The monthly and seasonal flow patterns on

         11     the Churchill River diversion will not change

         12     their function of the rainfall and snow melt in

         13     the watershed of the Churchill and

         14     Rat/Burntwood Rivers.  They will continue as

         15     they have for the last 25 years.

         16          In the immediate area of the new

         17     Generating Station, the daily flows will be

         18     shaped to conform to the modified run of the

         19     river operating mode.  On a daily basis, the

         20     flow into Wuskwatim Lake will equal the flow

         21     out.

         22          Wuskwatim will not have a perceptible

         23     effect on Lake Winnipeg water regime.

         24          When we filed the EIS back in April 2003,

         25     we did so on the basis that the assessment did




                                                                      215



          1     not see any perceptible effects on the overall

          2     system regime, including the Lake Winnipeg

          3     Regulation and Lower Nelson River flows and

          4     water levels.

          5          Subsequently, after filing the EIS, there

          6     was a lot of interest in system effects, and

          7     potential effects, and as Mr. Cormie explained

          8     this morning, as a result, Manitoba Hydro and

          9     NCN conducted a lot more analysis.

         10          This confirmed that there were little

         11     effects on the rest of the system.  It showed

         12     that there were no perceptible changes in the

         13     water levels for the water bodies downstream of

         14     Lake Winnipeg, including Cross Lake.  So, that

         15     confirmed what we had judged to be appropriate

         16     in the EIS initially.

         17          There are no perceptible water regime

         18     changes that are expected and, therefore, when

         19     we look at the pathways that Cam Osler

         20     discussed in the Assessment, you look for

         21     changes in one component in the environment to

         22     see if it will have other changes as they

         23     proceed.  For example, will water level changes

         24     affect erosion or the use of the shoreline by

         25     animals and people?  In this case, we found no




                                                                      216



          1     perceptible water regime changes and,

          2     therefore, we had no credible pathways for

          3     measuring other environmental effects.

          4          In the absence of credible pathways, we

          5     also determined that an Accumulative Effects

          6     Assessment was not appropriate.

          7          With respect to erosion, we do expect

          8     shore line erosion to increase on Wuskwatim

          9     Lake.  About 30% of the shorelines of Wuskwatim

         10     Lake and the adjoining lakes, like Sesep and

         11     Cranberry, are actually eroding today.  These

         12     are clay, silt shorelines.  They are mostly in

         13     the main part of Wuskwatim Lake on the south

         14     and east shorelines.  That is where the wind

         15     induced waves can hit the shoreline and cause

         16     erosion.

         17          These erosion rates on the shorelines were

         18     increased rather dramatically when this

         19     Churchill River Diversion was put in place.

         20     Wuskwatim Lake, for example, was increased in

         21     depth by about ten feet when the diversion was

         22     put in place.  So, there was fairly aggressive

         23     erosion in the initial years after the CRD was

         24     introduced.

         25          That erosion has been declining over the




                                                                      217



          1     past 25 years.  Hydro has had a number of

          2     sites.  I believe there is about 15 sites along

          3     Wuskwatim Lake itself, with about, I think,

          4     over all, 45 different erosion profiles being

          5     measured.

          6          Those erosion rates have been declining

          7     and today are approaching what you would expect

          8     to be long-term rates in northern lakes that

          9     have erodible shorelines.

         10          When the water levels are changed with the

         11     new project, they will be kept at the upper end

         12     of the current range during Wuskwatim

         13     operation.  Right now, they vary about 1.7

         14     metres.  They will now be kept pretty

         15     consistent within about six inches or so at 234

         16     metres above sea level.

         17          That will initially increase the amount of

         18     erosion on the shorelines that are subject to

         19     erosion.  In other words, where the water is

         20     not contacting bedrock, but is contacting the

         21     clay and silt shorelines, there will be

         22     increased erosion.

         23          After about five years, that erosion will

         24     settle down again and begin to decline.  After

         25     about 25 years, we expect the erosion rates for




                                                                      218



          1     all the eroding shorelines to be about the same

          2     as they are at present before the Wuskwatim

          3     project.

          4          There will be work done in the river, in

          5     the construction of this project.  There have

          6     been concerns expressed about how much sediment

          7     will be released into the river during the

          8     construction process.  We have a picture here

          9     showing a cofferdam construction during the

         10     Limestone Generation Project construction.  You

         11     can see there is equipment working on the river

         12     and you will have some sediments and soil

         13     released into the water.

         14          We recognise that will happen here as

         15     well, and particularly during cofferdam

         16     construction.  Most of this will occur during

         17     the first years -- years two to five of the

         18     construction period, especially when the

         19     cofferdams are removed.  It is pretty hard to

         20     avoid some sediment being mobilized into the

         21     water.

         22          DFO has been very interested in sediment

         23     management and they have asked for a separate

         24     document on how sediment will be managed during

         25     construction.  That document has been filed.




                                                                      219



          1     It is being reviewed by DFO at present.

          2          In the course of those discussions,

          3     Manitoba Hydro and NCN introduced additional

          4     measures to reduce sediment mobilization, and

          5     this plan now identifies specific design and

          6     contingency measures to mitigate sediment

          7     releases during the course of construction.

          8          There will be monitoring during

          9     construction and we are confident that with

         10     this mitigation, measures that we have defined

         11     in the Sediment Management Plan that the

         12     release of sediments will be satisfactory --

         13     and will be controlled to levels that are

         14     satisfactory to the regulatory authorities.

         15          With this increased erosion I have spoke

         16     about, there will be increase in shoreline

         17     debris.  As the banks do recede, the vegetation

         18     that is there will be brought into contact with

         19     the water.  Our belief is that most of this new

         20     debris will actually be trapped by the existing

         21     debris that is against the shoreline and the

         22     new debris will remain against the shore and

         23     not move out into the lake.  That is based on

         24     observations on other northern Manitoba lakes,

         25     including Wuskwatim.




                                                                      220



          1          When we discussed this with the local NCN

          2     Elders, their belief is that some of this

          3     additional debris will, in fact, be carried out

          4     into the lake or they are concerned it might

          5     be.  So, we have two different judgments here.

          6     We can't really determine which is correct, but

          7     we can say that this will be monitored.

          8     Manitoba Hydro has a Debris Management Program

          9     that it does implement across the various

         10     waterways that it uses.  This ivolves

         11     monitoring debris where it is an issue,

         12     cleaning up debris or controlling its release.

         13          In this case, we believe that new debris

         14     can be tied into the shorelines or removed, if

         15     necessary.

         16          So, there will be monitoring taken and in

         17     consultation with NCN, Manitoba Hydro will

         18     address the mobilization of this debris.

         19          With respect to the Transmission Project,

         20     there are 350 kilometers or so of transmission

         21     line.  There will be clearing and construction

         22     along this line.  The effects are actually

         23     confined primarily to the rights-of-way, 60

         24     metres wide, 110 metres in some cases and the

         25     immediate adjacent areas.




                                                                      221



          1          Transmission lines are typically

          2     constructed and the bulk of the construction

          3     takes place in the winter.  There is selective

          4     clearing, winter clearing, winter construction

          5     and this greatly reduces potential impacts, and

          6     Hydro has a great deal of experience in

          7     constructing these to the satisfaction of the

          8     Regulatory Authorities.

          9          The effects on soils and terrain are,

         10     therefore, confined mostly to the

         11     rights-of-way.  Access is limited during

         12     construction and so the effects are quite

         13     nominal.

         14          That concludes my comments on the Physical

         15     Environment.  At this point, I will turn it

         16     over to Mr. Stuart Davies who will discuss the

         17     Aquatic Environment.

         18               MR. DAVIES:  The Environmental Impact

         19   Statement for the Generation Project considered

         20   water quality, aquatic habitat, lower trophic

         21   levels, which includes aquatic plants, algae and

         22   invertebrates, fish and stream crossings.

         23          As councillor Elvis Thomas stated earlier,

         24     the NCN Elders and Resource Harvesters played a

         25     major role in designing these studies right




                                                                      222



          1     from the very start.  They also played a major

          2     role in conducting them.  About two-thirds of

          3     all the field workers that worked on the

          4     environmental studies were NCN members.

          5          Throughout the project, respect was shown

          6     for the environment.  Just as an example, when

          7     the fish were taken from the water to be

          8     sampled, tobacco was offered to the water.

          9          For the Transmission project, EIS

         10     considered watersheds and stream crossings and

         11     fish and fish habitat.

         12          There is an extensive water quality

         13     sampling program that has been conducted.

         14     There is about four years of data that has been

         15     collected right now and this coming year would

         16     be the fifth year of pre-project data.

         17          It is being conducted over quite a large

         18     geographic area that originally extended from

         19     upstream of Wuskwatim Lake to just upstream

         20     from Thompson.

         21          Through the PIP process, there were

         22     comments and input through downstream

         23     communities and as a result of that, the Water

         24     Quality Sampling Program was extended to an

         25     area just upstream of Split Lake.




                                                                      223



          1          There is also a broad range of parameters

          2     that are being looked at.  It includes a full

          3     suite of nutrients, metals, and TSS, as George

          4     had discussed earlier.

          5          Selected sites, parasites and bacteria

          6     were also collected as well as hydrocarbons.

          7          During construction, there will be some

          8     specific construction activity that will cause

          9     a short-term water quality changes.  We had

         10     talked about the increases and total suspended

         11     solids that would occur during the construction

         12     of the cofferdams and the removal of the

         13     cofferdams.

         14          There will also be sewage inputs during

         15     the construction period that will be monitored

         16     throughout the construction of the project.

         17          I was also told the Sediment Management

         18     Plan, which addresses the TSS issues that have

         19     been raised has been put on the website as of

         20     Friday.

         21          During operation, we don't expect to see

         22     any major changes to water quality except at

         23     some local areas there will some increased

         24     water erosion along the shorelines and perhaps

         25     some TSS in the immediate area.  But, the lake




                                                                      224



          1     itself will not be affected and the areas

          2     downstream we don't expect to see any

          3     measurable changes either.

          4          The Wuskwatim Lake reduced water level

          5     fluctuations will increase the amount of

          6     habitat and we expect that will increase the

          7     invertebrate production in the lake and also

          8     the forage fish eaten there by the larger fish.

          9          We feel it will increase the spawning

         10     habitat that will be available to fish.  Right

         11     now there is about a 4.5 foot water level

         12     fluctuation during the year.  And with the

         13     project in place, the water levels will be much

         14     stabler.

         15          So, habitat that is sometimes wet right

         16     now and sometimes dry, will be wet the majority

         17     of the time and we will see increased

         18     production from that.

         19          Initially, increased erosion on Wuskwatim

         20     Lake may reduce the suitability of some of the

         21     areas for invertebrates and fish.  Again,

         22     because some of the near shore erosion that we

         23     do expect there will be some site specific

         24     reductions in invertebrates and fish.

         25          Overall though, in the long-term, we




                                                                      225



          1     expect that there will be increases in the four

          2     key fish species, which are:  Pickerel or

          3     Walleye, Jackfish or Northern Pike, Lake Cisco

          4     or Tullibee or White Fish.

          5          Long-term populations in the lake will of

          6     course depend on the level of harvest.  We did

          7     expect to see an increase in domestic harvest.

          8     White Fish from Wuskwatim Lake are preferred by

          9     NCN Elders, so we expect some will be

         10     harvested.  There is also commercial fishing on

         11     the lake.

         12          It is good to have a bit of perspective on

         13     the areas that we are talking about.  This

         14     large area here is the area that we are saying

         15     will be positively effected by the stabilized

         16     water levels over the long-term.  This smaller

         17     area here is the area where we will see larger

         18     water fluctuations and this very small area

         19     here is where the flooding will appear.  The

         20     flooding will be limited to that small piece

         21     right there.  Again, the stable water levels

         22     here and increased water level fluctuations

         23     downstream.

         24          This area here, which is a key part of the

         25     lake, which is primary Walleye spotting habitat




                                                                      226



          1     will not be affected by erosion on the main

          2     part of the lake.

          3          Operation of a Generating Station will

          4     have a negative effect on the fish and fish

          5     habitat in the downstream reach that we have

          6     just showed.  There will be increased water

          7     level fluctuations on top of the existing water

          8     level fluctuations and we also expect that

          9     there will be fewer fish migrating from

         10     Wuskwatim Lake -- or moving from Wuskwatim Lake

         11     downstream.

         12          Right now, fish currently cannot move

         13     upstream over Wuskwatim Falls or Taskinigup

         14     Falls.  It is about a 22-metre rise if you

         15     consider Wuskwatim Falls and Taskinigup Falls

         16     together.  Some fish do move downstream over

         17     Taskinigup Falls.  The movement is not a

         18     migration -- fish moving downstream as a

         19     migration wouldn't be a very good life history

         20     movement.  Once they moved down, they are

         21     basically lost to the system.

         22          When the Generating Station is in place,

         23     we expect that fewer fish will move down for a

         24     couple of reasons.  One, the larval fish will

         25     not be drifting downstream.  We also expect




                                                                      227



          1     that with the change in habitat, we will have

          2     fewer fish going downstream than before.  One

          3     of the reasons being that right now when fish

          4     move over to Wuskwatim Falls, they are

          5     basically trapped between -- excuse me.  When

          6     they move over Wuskwatim Falls, they are

          7     basically trapped between Wuskwatim Falls and

          8     Taskinigup Falls and can't get back into the

          9     main portion of the lake.

         10          When the Generating Station is in place,

         11     the water levels at Wuskwatim Falls will allow

         12     the fish to swim back rather than being trapped

         13     between to impassable falls.

         14          The fish that do go downstream will move

         15     through the turbines and there will be some

         16     mortality.  We expect that the survival rates

         17     of fish going through the turbines will be

         18     roughly between 80 to 90%.  We feel that is a

         19     relatively conservative estimate.

         20          The net effect on fish in the study area

         21     as a whole, we feel will be positive.  There

         22     will be a small positive increase upstream.  As

         23     you saw from the map, the area upstream is much

         24     larger than the area downstream and it provides

         25     better fish habitat and it is the area that is




                                                                      228



          1     harvested by domestic fishers and commercial

          2     fishers.

          3          DFO plays an important role in regulating

          4     aquatic developments.  One of the things that

          5     it requires is the Habitat Compensation Plan,

          6     which provides compensation for negative

          7     effects to the fish habitat.

          8          A draft Fish Habitat Compensation Plan has

          9     been provided to DFO.  We have been working

         10     closely with them to develop that.  That plan

         11     compensates for the negative effects on fish

         12     habitat.

         13          If we take a look at the fact that we feel

         14     overall that there will be a small, but

         15     positive effect on fish in the area as a whole,

         16     the addition of compensation being provided by

         17     the Fish Habitat Compensation Plan will provide

         18     even a larger benefit to fish populations in

         19     the area.

         20          In regards to mercury, mercury was one of

         21     the issues that NCN raised very early on in the

         22     process because of their experience with the

         23     Churchill River Diversion and a lot of effort

         24     has been focused on that.  We feel that there

         25     will be a very small increase in mercury




                                                                      229



          1     because of the small area that will be flooded.

          2     We don't feel that you will be able to

          3     distinguish the increase in mercury from

          4     natural variation.

          5          We looked at both a best case scenario and

          6     a worst case scenario and out of the worst case

          7     scenario, we are still not certain if you will

          8     be able to see the difference in some of the

          9     fish species after the project.

         10          Downstream from the project, there will be

         11     increases in some individual fish that may be

         12     resident near some of the peat areas that we

         13     feel will be decay with the project.

         14          Downstream of Opegano Lake, we don't feel

         15     that there will be any measurable change in the

         16     mercury levels.

         17          One of the things -- the way that mercury

         18     is transported downstream is primarily through

         19     biota.  One researcher recently gave me a good

         20     example that provides people with a perspective

         21     that if you are looking at downstream

         22     transport, the difference between mercury being

         23     transported in water as compared to fish is, if

         24     you ate an average meal of pickerel, the

         25     mercury that you would accumulate from that




                                                                      230



          1     would be similar to washing that meal down with

          2     about 100,000 gallons of water.

          3          So, there is a huge difference between the

          4     amount of mercury that is transported by water

          5     and the amount of mercury in the biota.

          6          Right now, there is very few fish that are

          7     moving downstream, primarily because of the

          8     impassable falls, the Taskinigup Falls,

          9     Wuskwatim Falls and downstream of Opegano,

         10     there is also impassable falls.

         11          Manitoba Hydro and NCN have committed to a

         12     very complex, detailed monitoring program and a

         13     draft of that monitoring program has been

         14     submitted to the Department of Fisheries &

         15     Oceans for their review.  The program will

         16     monitor water quality and vertebrates, fish and

         17     fish habitat and mercury levels during both the

         18     construction period and the operation of the

         19     project.

         20          Among other things, the results of the

         21     monitoring plan will be used to confirm whether

         22     impact decisions are correct or not.  They will

         23     used to identify unexpected impacts and refine

         24     mitigation as required.

         25          In regards to Transmission, local




                                                                      231



          1     knowledge was used to avoid important fish

          2     habitat and fishing areas during the routing of

          3     the Transmission line.  There is extensive

          4     consultation with local communities.  No

          5     habitat critical to sustaining local fish

          6     populations was identified along the proposed

          7     route.  All potential negative effects on

          8     aquatic habitat can be mitigated for

          9     construction of the transmission lines.

         10          There will be site-specific environmental

         11     protection plans that will be put in place to

         12     make sure that impacts to fish and fish habitat

         13     do not occur, and there will also be follow-up

         14     monitoring that will happen during the

         15     construction period again as another check.

         16          I think it is now passed over to Dave

         17     Hicks for the Terrestrial Environment.

         18               MR. HICKS:  For the record, I am Dave

         19   Hicks.  With your permission, Mr. Chair, I will

         20   stay in my chair.  I am not as mobile as my

         21   colleagues here.

         22          My particular role in the Environmental

         23     Assessment studies and the Route Selection

         24     studies were for the Transmission facilities.

         25     I have about 11 slides here which deal with




                                                                      232



          1     both Transmission and Generation in the context

          2     of effects and impacts on the Terrestrial

          3     Environment.

          4          The Environmental Impact Statements in

          5     both cases consider the following Terrestrial

          6     features:  Plants and habitat, insects,

          7     amphibians and reptiles, birds and mammals.  As

          8     my colleague Mr. Osler noted earlier, that

          9     consideration did not end with the filing of

         10     the Environmental Impact Statements in

         11     April 2003.  We have continued to do field

         12     research through the summer of 2003 and will be

         13     doing additional research in the years leading

         14     up to the clearing and construction for the

         15     Transmission lines and the development of the

         16     roadway, for example.

         17          In the case of the Generation Project, the

         18     effects on habitats and plants will be site

         19     specific or local.

         20          Construction of the Generating Station

         21     will potentially affect about 2600 hectares.

         22     That is a very conservative estimate.  That

         23     deals with the total amount of disruption of

         24     the Terrestrial Environment that might occur

         25     over the 6-year construction period for the




                                                                      233



          1     Generating Station.  Much of that will be

          2     rehabilitated or restored towards the end of

          3     the construction period.  In the final

          4     analysis, there will be about 660 hectares

          5     permanently removed from its current vegetative

          6     state.

          7          I should confess many of my colleagues

          8     consider I am metrically challenged.  So, if

          9     anyone has a problem with hectares, I will

         10     remind you that one hectare is two and a half

         11     acres.  One hectare is basically 100 metres

         12     squared and there are 100 hectares in one

         13     square kilometer.  So, the 660 hectares that

         14     would be permanently removed here translates to

         15     6.6 square kilometers.

         16          No endangered, threatened or very rare

         17     plants were found in the course of the research

         18     work for the Generation site.

         19          The use of the phrase "very rare" refers

         20     to classification systems that are applied both

         21     federally and provincially.  Most of the

         22     effected habitats are common in this particular

         23     area of the province.

         24          There are three less common habitat types,

         25     specifically, Jackie Forest on dry soil,




                                                                      234



          1     which is encountered in the vicinity of the

          2     portions of the access road in the borrow

          3     areas, north and east of the Generation Station

          4     site.  There is some Balsam Fir forest, which

          5     is generally at the site of the Generating

          6     Station and at one stream crossing.  There is

          7     some white spruce forest, again associated with

          8     the Generation Station site and with the shores

          9     of Wuskwatim Lake.

         10          The mitigation measures there would ensure

         11     that any damage or disruption to those less

         12     common habitat types would be subject to

         13     replanting or similar mitigation at/or that

         14     immediate site or nearby.

         15          Again, talking to the Generation Station,

         16     the effects on the shoreline habitat and plants

         17     will vary a bit by location.  Stuart has

         18     earlier said that upstream of the Generating

         19     Station, the reduced water level fluctuations

         20     will occur and that will tend to favor the

         21     growth of plants that are adapted to these

         22     conditions; for example, peak lands, sedges.

         23     There will be a decrease in plants like

         24     cattails which favor a more fluctuation in

         25     water levels.




                                                                      235



          1          Downstream in the reach immediately below

          2     the power station, the increased frequency of

          3     water levels fluctuations could increase the

          4     break-up of peatlands along the shore,

          5     particularly in some of the inlets where the

          6     water is slower moving and there is a -- some

          7     incidence of peatland.  It could also reduce

          8     the abundance of stable water regime.

          9          In the case of Transmission, the effects

         10     on forest and plants will be relatively small.

         11     In this case, about 2800 hectares or 28 square

         12     kilometers.

         13          Now, I am referring here -- again,

         14     conservatively -- to the entire area of the

         15     rights-of-way.  George Rempel has earlier

         16     mentioned that there are about 350 kilometers

         17     of Transmission line associated with this

         18     project.  In point of fact, that refers to the

         19     length of the right-of-way associated with the

         20     project as opposed to the length of actual

         21     lines.

         22          As he explained to you, in the case of the

         23     corridor between Herblet Lake station at Snow

         24     Lake and Wuskwatim itself, there will be two

         25     lines sharing a single right-of-way.




                                                                      236



          1          So, the overall 350 kilometer length

          2     refers basically to the distance from Thompson

          3     to Wuskwatim to Snow Lake to The Pas.

          4          That length, multiplied by the variously

          5     60 metre or 110 metre right-of-way produces the

          6     estimate of 28 square kilometers effective

          7     right-of-way.  The actual clearing will be

          8     restricted to about 50% of that because the

          9     remainder is either water, drop-out crop, or

         10     wet lands.  Areas where, although there will

         11     still be an effect, the effect will not be to

         12     clear the areas.  The same impact will not be

         13     incurred.

         14          Shrub cover post-construction will be

         15     maintained along the rights-of-way.

         16          There will be a rare plant survey

         17     conducted along the rights-of-way.  Again, this

         18     is a bit misleading.  There have already been

         19     plant surveys along the rights-of-way and will

         20     continue to be so additional surveys.

         21          In 2004, for example, our plan for the

         22     Birch Tree to Wuskwatim section as preparatory

         23     to finalizing the Environmental Protection Plan

         24     for that area and prior to the clearing of that

         25     right-of-way.




                                                                      237



          1          The same will occur for other Transmission

          2     line rights-of-way, later on as we approach the

          3     time of their actual construction.

          4          One of the -- apart from the very careful

          5     routing of the Transmission lines, one of the

          6     principal mitigating effects is the fact that

          7     the lines will be constructed during the winter

          8     when there is far less risk of damage to

          9     vegetation.

         10          In the case of both the Transmission and

         11     Generation projects, there are not to be

         12     significant adverse effects in particular on

         13     wildlife.

         14          There will be site specific measures taken

         15     to minimize effects during construction.  These

         16     will be described in "EnvPPs", which is

         17     shorthand for "Environmental Protection Plans".

         18     Site specific plans that will be filed prior to

         19     the actual commencement of construction, for

         20     both the infrastructure and the Generation

         21     Station and for the Transmission Lines

         22     associated with the Transmission project.

         23          Construction effects generally tend to be

         24     short-term and local.  An example, noise during

         25     construction may be a cause to temporarily




                                                                      238



          1     scare wildlife away from the right-of-way.

          2               Keep in mind the construction period

          3   for the Generating Station is approximately six

          4   years.  In the case of the Transmission lines, it

          5   tends to be one or two construction seasons.

          6   Winter time, two or three months in length and

          7   actual construction activity tends to be

          8   concentrated at particular points as construction

          9   moves down the right-of-way.

         10               Effects of operation of the Generation

         11   and Transmission projects on birds are not

         12   expected to be significant.  The effects will be

         13   small, although in some cases, long-term during

         14   the operation period; peat habitat and some

         15   habitat loss through erosion.

         16               Emerging peatlands -- I think Stuart

         17   earlier referred to the fact that there are some

         18   mobile peat islands in that may be enjoying the

         19   isolation of the islands now, may be less isolated

         20   and more prone to predators than they would be in

         21   the current condition.

         22               The reduced fluctuations in water

         23   levels upstream of the station will generally

         24   benefit shoreline nesting areas, as we said, may

         25   reduce some areas of offshore marsh habitat




                                                                      239



          1   preferred by certain species.

          2               In the case of transmission project

          3   again, the altered bird community, other than the

          4   rights-of-way themselves, is relatively limited to

          5   the area adjacent to the rights-of-way, and we

          6   have filed a great deal of information on that

          7   particular topic in both the EIS's and in the

          8   supplementary materials.

          9               There is a small risk of bird

         10   collision.  Manitoba Hydro experience with this

         11   tends principally to involve waterfowl in areas

         12   where there is a lot of waterfowl staging during

         13   migration and where there may be fly-ways that

         14   would be perpendicular to the rights-of-way of the

         15   transmission lines.  Even in those cases, there

         16   are mitigative measures that can be taken.

         17               In the particular case here, we, at

         18   this point, have not identified any special

         19   mitigation requirements for birds because

         20   principally of the location of the routes relative

         21   to known staging areas within the area.

         22               Operation effects of mammals, again,

         23   for both the generation and transmission lines

         24   will be small, not expected to be significant.

         25   There will be some loss of habitat, that would




                                                                      240



          1   will be particularly at sites like station sites

          2   or the generation station site itself where the

          3   loss of habitat is permanent.

          4               There will be habitat alteration in

          5   other locations, for example, along the

          6   transmission line rights-of-way, the loss of tree

          7   vegetation doesn't necessarily mean a complete

          8   loss of habitat, it means an alteration in

          9   habitat.  As shrubs and grasses come back into the

         10   right-of-way, there is a different habitat,

         11   different species in some cases may favour that

         12   habitat.

         13               Access management, it is a key

         14   consideration in this conclusion that the effects

         15   on mammals will be small and will not be

         16   significant, and access is a significant concern

         17   of all the communities we visited, both with

         18   respect to the access road for the generation

         19   station, but also with respect to the transmission

         20   line rights-of-way themselves.

         21               There is a good deal of effort

         22   currently being made.  I know that Stuart has just

         23   recently, working very closely with NCN, has

         24   developed an access management plan for the access

         25   road.  We are very close at this point to an




                                                                      241



          1   access management plan for the first transmission

          2   project, which is the construction power line from

          3   Thompson into Wuskwatim itself.  We have some

          4   comfort now I think in dealing with NCN, and some

          5   comfort on the part of NCN members, that access is

          6   manageable through careful routing and through

          7   attention to detail in the routing.

          8               A couple slides here that deal with

          9   specific species, caribou of course are a species

         10   of considerable interest and concern, highly

         11   valued by NCN and other communities in the area.

         12   We do not expect the impacts on caribou or the

         13   effects on caribou to be significant.  The changes

         14   in habitat will be relatively small.

         15               In the case of generation project, the

         16   road has been carefully selected to avoid

         17   important winter range and calving habitat.  There

         18   are only a small number of caribou known to be

         19   present in the area that would be directly

         20   affected.

         21               In the case of the transmission

         22   project, we don't have the same certainty because

         23   of the larger areas involved, but we have listened

         24   very carefully to both NCN members and the case of

         25   the other Aboriginal communities to other




                                                                      242



          1   harvesters, elders who have told us the areas that

          2   they feel should be avoided, in part because of

          3   their concern for caribou habitat.

          4               There will be some minor alteration of

          5   the habitat on an ongoing basis along the

          6   rights-of-way.

          7               The rights-of-way themselves, in the

          8   case of transmission lines, are not considered to

          9   pose an actual barrier to caribou movements.

         10   There have been studies that suggest that caribou

         11   will cross the rights-of-way without a great deal

         12   of difficulty.

         13               Another slide, this one on moose.

         14   Again, the effects are not expected to be

         15   significant.  The habitat for moose in the area is

         16   widespread.  The changes in habitat will be

         17   relatively small.  High quality habitat has

         18   generally be avoided through the careful routing

         19   of the access route.  The transmission line

         20   rights-of-way are expected to have a neutral

         21   effect.  The forage will tend to be better along

         22   the cleared rights-of-way, but experience

         23   elsewhere has shown no demonstration of an

         24   increase in habitat use along the rights-of-way by

         25   moose.




                                                                      243



          1               Effects on fur bearers will vary by

          2   species and between the projects, and again

          3   overall they are not expected to be significant.

          4               In the case of a generation project,

          5   negative effects on aquatic fur bearers included

          6   the small -- include the small loss of habitat

          7   from flooding and erosion.  In the case of the

          8   more stable water levels upstream of the dam,

          9   again, we said earlier that will tend to reduce or

         10   have an adverse effect on certain plant life like

         11   cattails.

         12               Cattails are, in turn, a significant

         13   food source for muskrats, so there may be a small

         14   negative effect on muskrat that is a result of

         15   that change.  There will, on the other hand, be

         16   some negative effects because of the increased

         17   water level fluctuations levels downstream of the

         18   G.S.  On balance, there is no significant change

         19   anticipated.  Again, the more stable water levels

         20   in Wuskwatim Lake should be positive in respect of

         21   their impact on aquatic fur bearers and with

         22   respect to the increase in shoreline peat habitat.

         23               Effects on fur bearers again will vary

         24   between species and projects, and again overall

         25   are not expected to be significant.




                                                                      244



          1               I think I got a little ahead of myself

          2   there at one point.

          3               Again, if I can summarize quickly, the

          4   generation project, the net effect is no

          5   significant change expected.  In the case of the

          6   transmission line, there will be some small

          7   habitat effects on fur bearers and some potential

          8   fragmentation effects on certain species.  I think

          9   it came up in the course of the interrogatories

         10   that there is some literature that suggest that

         11   martians, for example, might be at the limit of

         12   their willingness to cross the 110 metre gap that

         13   would be created in the right-of-way between

         14   Wuskwatim and Herblet Lake.

         15               There is other evidence that suggests

         16   that may be not be that serious, but nonetheless

         17   there are concerns in the area which have been

         18   identified in the filing.

         19               Finally, as in the case of the Aquatic

         20   Environment, it is intended that there will be

         21   monitoring and follow-up during construction and

         22   immediately following construction.  That

         23   monitoring will be directed principally to

         24   ensuring that the mitigation measures identified

         25   and demanded of the contractor in the construction




                                                                      245



          1   of the lines, and outlined in the environmental

          2   protection plans, have been complied with.  If

          3   they haven't, this would be the point when any

          4   remedial measures would be identified and

          5   implemented.

          6               We are also in the process now of

          7   developing monitoring plans for the operation

          8   phase.  This is becoming more frequent and a more

          9   routine aspect of environmental planning with

         10   Manitoba Hydro.  In the course of the 15 or so

         11   years that I have been involved with the

         12   corporation on projects of this kind, we have

         13   gradually been, I think, improving the quality of

         14   environmental protection planning, and working

         15   very hard in recent years to incorporate not just

         16   construction, but also operating considerations in

         17   the protection plans, so that the operation staff

         18   are equally aware of the issues and looking to

         19   avoid any detrimental effect in the rights-of-way.

         20               I mentioned earlier that there is

         21   concern about access, increased access.  In some

         22   cases, trappers with NCN actually see an

         23   opportunity here to gain better access to areas

         24   south of the Burntwood that have been relatively

         25   inaccessible since the implementation of the CRD




                                                                      246



          1   because of water crossing risks and ice

          2   conditions.  But there is concern in virtually all

          3   the communities that we visited, certainly among

          4   the resource users, that increased access might be

          5   a problem.

          6               What we have said, experience has

          7   indicated to us that the problem is not perhaps as

          8   serious as is the concern in some cases, but to

          9   the extent that there is a concern expressed by a

         10   local community, we have undertaken to work with

         11   the communities to develop access management

         12   plans.  As I said earlier, we are nearing

         13   completion of such a plan, or at least the first

         14   draft of such a plan with NCN for the construction

         15   power line from Thompson into Wuskwatim.

         16               That concludes my presentation and I

         17   will turn it back to Cam Osler.  Thank you.

         18               MR. OSLER:  The final set of

         19   components we will talk about is socioeconomic and

         20   the heritage resources.  This set of -- this part

         21   of the environmental components, as set out in the

         22   guidelines, includes the following:  It includes

         23   resource use by people.  It includes land and

         24   water use in the transmission EIS.  It includes

         25   the economy, which are the effects on jobs,




                                                                      247



          1   business, economic activity.  It includes

          2   infrastructure and services in the communities,

          3   whether they are affected.  It includes personal

          4   family and community life, which itself is a broad

          5   range of elements dealing with the family, with

          6   the person, and with the community, whether it is

          7   health and safety, whether it is community access,

          8   whether it is esthetics, planning by communities,

          9   governance, a wide range of matters that we will

         10   talk about.  And finally the heritage resources,

         11   which is a separate component in the EIS

         12   guidelines and in the EIS statements, which are

         13   physical heritage resources, and whether they are

         14   affected in any way, shape or form by this

         15   project.

         16               The pathways for these effects are

         17   laid out in the document.  We are not going to go

         18   through them today, but I will just go to some

         19   highlights like my colleagues.

         20               Dealing with first resource use, the

         21   generation projects, the effects will tend to be

         22   long-term and positive for the reasons you already

         23   heard.

         24               Resource harvesting in the Wuskwatim

         25   area is currently limited due to difficult access.




                                                                      248



          1   By developing this project, there will be

          2   increased access, not only where you see the road,

          3   but for harvesters, if this is the way people want

          4   to manage it, even across the dam to the south

          5   side of the Nelson House resource management area,

          6   which has not been accessible given the CRD, and

          7   there will be positive effects therefore for the

          8   domestic harvesters, commercial fishers and

          9   trappers.

         10               A road access management plan being

         11   developed -- well, a draft plan has been

         12   developed, it has now been approved by NCN and

         13   Manitoba Hydro, and it was circulated to

         14   participants in this hearing as of Friday, and it

         15   is on the Manitoba Hydro website as of Friday.

         16               So, that's a draft plan that focuses

         17   on the construction phase in particular and the

         18   outlines of how they would think they would

         19   approach the operations phase.  It talks about

         20   controlled access on the road.  It talks about the

         21   intent of having that controlled access maintained

         22   even during operations by having a private road or

         23   its equivalent.

         24               So, we commend that document for

         25   people's attention to lay out the approach that




                                                                      249



          1   NCN and Manitoba Hydro are taking with respect to

          2   that issue.

          3               Transmission effects on resource use

          4   will be both positive and negative.  The clearing

          5   and construction activities may cause some

          6   wildlife to temporarily move away from the area,

          7   as Dave Hicks has just explained.  Short term and

          8   minor will be the nature of the effects.  The

          9   trappers will be notified in advance of the

         10   schedule for clearing and construction activities,

         11   and Manitoba Hydro will reimburse trappers for

         12   loss for harvesting during construction and

         13   clearing.

         14               After construction some trappers may

         15   then benefit from improved access to their

         16   traplines, which has been noted throughout the

         17   discussions that have taken place with them.

         18   If a community, though, has concerns about

         19   increased access, a transmission access management

         20   plan will be developed with them.  And of course

         21   you have heard that NCN for sure is asking that

         22   this be done, and it will be done for transmission

         23   routes in their area.

         24               Transmission effects on land and water

         25   use -- which is specifically required in the




                                                                      250



          1   guidelines for the transmission EIS.  None of the

          2   proposed routes are located on existing reserved

          3   lands.  Two treaty land entitlement selections are

          4   affected by the proposed routes, and discussion

          5   will be required with the affected First Nation,

          6   which is NCN, and the Provincial government

          7   regarding any necessary use by Manitoba Hydro of

          8   those lands.

          9               The proposed routes cross through the

         10   Nelson House resource management area, the

         11   Cormorant resource management areas, and OCN's

         12   tradition territory.  Proposed routes also crosses

         13   the Tom Lamb wildlife management area, and area of

         14   special interest of ASI under the Manitoba's

         15   protected areas initiative.  It does this for

         16   approximately 47 kilometers.  Approximately 16 of

         17   these 47 kilometers are parallel to an existing

         18   rail line.  The transmission line is expected to

         19   have a very minimal effect therefore on this

         20   wildlife management area.

         21               Moving beyond the effects on resource

         22   use and land and water use, and moving into the

         23   economy, the pathway -- main pathway here is the

         24   construction period jobs of the generation

         25   project.  This diagram summarizes those jobs over




                                                                      251



          1   the time period, the six years of the

          2   construction, which if the project goes forward,

          3   it will be 2004 to 2010.  It shows you two stages

          4   of construction.  The first two years, access

          5   road, infrastructure, and camp development, in

          6   order to get the site prepared for the development

          7   to be done, and the next four years stage 2 of the

          8   generating station construction itself.  You see

          9   that the nature of the employment jumps up and

         10   down.  It peaks in the summer and is very low in

         11   the winter.  It is seasonal in its nature.

         12               The two colours here tell you two

         13   different levels of skill requirements.  The green

         14   represents designated trades.  That is trades such

         15   as carpenters, electricians, where you have to

         16   have at least four years of training and

         17   employment history in order to be fully qualified,

         18   and you have to have at least three years before

         19   you are even qualified as an apprentice for the 20

         20   percent of the jobs that will be available for

         21   apprentices.

         22               When you see all that green, don't

         23   think that somebody gets a job at day one and

         24   keeps going.  Of course it cycles through the

         25   different trades as they are required, the




                                                                      252



          1   carpenters being earlier on and electricians being

          2   later on.  So you don't get one job all the way

          3   through here, and you don't get one job all year

          4   long.

          5               In terms of the blue, we are talking

          6   about the balance of construction contractor jobs,

          7   the 90 percent or more jobs on the site that are

          8   being contracted by the contractors.

          9               These are the non-designated trades,

         10   construction support services, heavy equipment

         11   operators, truck drivers, people working the

         12   catering, et cetera.

         13               These require typically less than

         14   three years worth of training, and in many cases,

         15   almost the majority of them, less than 12 months

         16   worth of training and history of employment.  They

         17   are very dominant jobs in stage two period, and

         18   they are not as dominant in the period of

         19   building, the actual construction of the facility

         20   over the four years.

         21               All of these jobs on this construction

         22   site will be through a collective agreement.  The

         23   current collective agreement Burntwood/Nelson

         24   Agreement will expire and a new one is being

         25   negotiated.  It is not yet negotiated.




                                                                      253



          1               Looking at the information that you

          2   saw there, our job was to look at this and come up

          3   with some estimates of what the effects of

          4   employment will be for Aboriginal northerners.  It

          5   will be positive is our conclusion, but the

          6   numbers were developed looking at factors,

          7   including what you just saw for generation

          8   project.  We looked at four factors in effect.  We

          9   looked at the negotiated contractors, contracts,

         10   which could be very important through stage one.

         11   Looked at the pre-project training activities that

         12   were described earlier today by Mr. Wojczynski and

         13   Ken Adams, being funded by Hydro and the

         14   governments -- and also being heavily developed at

         15   NCN through their ATEC training facility which has

         16   been developed in the last short while.  We looked

         17   at the preference that is likely to exist.  We

         18   made an assumption that the preference for hiring

         19   will be for Aboriginal northerners, resident not

         20   just at NCN, but resident in what we called the

         21   Nelson and Burntwood River regions, which includes

         22   South Indian Lake all the way downstream on the

         23   CRD.  It includes the entire water reserve area of

         24   the CRD and the LWR, as well as Pikwitonei,

         25   Wabowden and Thicket Portage.




                                                                      254



          1               Finally, we considered beyond the job

          2   training activities as well required of the

          3   contractor.  With all these things in mind, our

          4   estimates for the two stages, the first two years,

          5   stage one, that there would be, as you can see

          6   here, 81 to 93 potential jobs for NCN, including

          7   their members at South Indian Lake, and 57 to 69

          8   potential jobs for other Aboriginal residents.

          9   That reflects the very important role that we

         10   think negotiated contracts involving NCN

         11   businesses will play in that stage.  During stage

         12   two, there is much more employment but a much

         13   heavier requirement in terms of training and skill

         14   development.  The numbers are, absolute terms, not

         15   that much different, they go up a bit, 80 to 113

         16   potential NCN jobs, and 181 to 256 potential jobs

         17   for other northern Aboriginal residents.  But the

         18   percentages go down because of the skill

         19   requirements we are talking about.  .

         20               Overall, in the project region that I

         21   talked about, Nelson River CRD region, up to 90

         22   percent of the jobs during the first two years, or

         23   about 142 at the peak, might go to northern

         24   residents in that region, and 31 to 42 percent

         25   might go to northern residents during the next 4




                                                                      255



          1   years.

          2               If this is achieved through all the

          3   measures we are talking about, it will be

          4   noticeably different than say the Limestone

          5   experience where the average was in the range of

          6   20 to 25 percent of northern Aboriginal

          7   employment.

          8               The full socioeconomic effect of what

          9   we are talking about here is not just money in

         10   people's pockets, it is all the effects that go

         11   with it in terms of the training and the

         12   development and the capability and the learning

         13   experiences that come from working in this type of

         14   environment if you haven't had the opportunity

         15   before, and the opportunity, if you like that type

         16   of work, to do it again in the future.  It is,

         17   particularly for those that get more training, it

         18   is a career, and it s development of which this is

         19   a start rather and an end.  The extent to which

         20   this is indeed the first of several projects could

         21   be very important to these people if they have the

         22   opportunity to get their start here.

         23               Moving beyond that, the generation

         24   construction effects will include northern

         25   business purchasing opportunities, negotiated




                                                                      256



          1   contracts are being pursued with NCN, as I have

          2   just mentioned.  The limited opportunities may

          3   also exist for other entrepreneurs to start

          4   businesses.  To the extent that we go beyond that

          5   and think of contracts not being negotiated

          6   contracts, we would be looking at Manitoba Hydro

          7   having tenders for qualified northern businesses

          8   such as restricted tendering, or from all

          9   businesses which would be open tendering.

         10               Overall, when you look at the full

         11   development, the full hundreds of millions of

         12   dollars that are being dealt with, most of the

         13   contracts for developing this facility, including

         14   the general civil contract, will be awarded

         15   through open tender.

         16               Generation will benefit NCN also

         17   through ownership investment.  In the type of

         18   assessment we are doing, we look at this.  If you

         19   are looking under the Canadian Environmental

         20   Assessment Act, we wouldn't look at this.

         21               NCN has an option to be a partner in

         22   the project with an interest of up to 33 percent,

         23   as you have heard.  Revenue from this investment

         24   would be a main economic benefit realized by NCN

         25   during the operations phase, after the facility




                                                                      257



          1   starts operations, ranging from several million

          2   dollars a year in the early years after 2010, and

          3   growing to tens of millions of dollars a year in

          4   the long-term.  However, NCN also share in some of

          5   the risks and actual revenues will be based the

          6   financial performance of the generation project

          7   itself.

          8               Moving beyond the generation, the

          9   transmission effects on employment and business

         10   will be positive and small.  The contracting

         11   opportunities in this case will be available under

         12   Manitoba Hydro's northern purchasing policy rather

         13   than throughout the partnership agreement as such,

         14   or through anything we were just talking about.

         15               Discussions with First Nations and

         16   Aboriginal communities in the vicinity of these

         17   transmission lines will help to assess and improve

         18   opportunities.  These discussions will be ongoing

         19   as the projects get approved and go forward.  The

         20   employment opportunities for transmission line

         21   construction will be during the winter months.

         22   They tend to be over two years, one year for

         23   clearing and the next year for construction

         24   activities.

         25               The jobs are much, much smaller, and




                                                                      258



          1   we are just talking about in the generation.  You

          2   are talking 15 to 30 jobs for each one of those

          3   three line segments, Thompson to Wuskwatim, or

          4   Wuskwatim to Snow Lake, or Snow Lake to Ralls

          5   Island, and maybe 10 to 70 jobs during the second

          6   year of construction.  So, there are very much

          7   smaller opportunities than exist with the

          8   generation site.

          9               When we go to operation and

         10   maintenance, there may be -- it may result in some

         11   small sort term contracts for brush clearing on an

         12   ongoing basis as the lines are maintained.

         13               At the stations that are being built,

         14   the transmission stations -- Birch Tree and

         15   Wuskwatim are new, and the others are being

         16   modified inside their existing limits -- stations

         17   will require highly specialized workers, but it is

         18   likely to provide some job opportunities during

         19   development.

         20               Moving from the economy to the

         21   infrastructure and services, the effects will be

         22   mitigated.  The generation project, the community

         23   based training and construction employment may

         24   result in some NCN members and their families

         25   returning to Nelson House.  Returning migration




                                                                      259



          1   may strain the housing situation and other

          2   infrastructure, and measures will be taken to

          3   monitor and reduce this.

          4               There is a very wide range of

          5   possibility here.  The members in the reports,

          6   anywhere from 35 to 400 individuals.  This has to

          7   be monitored.  The community is looking at how to

          8   do this.  It has to be mitigated and managed as a

          9   process.  But on the other hand, if people are

         10   coming back, they are coming back for a reason,

         11   and the best we can do is to inform them and to

         12   help manage the process to the best of everybody's

         13   ability.

         14               Transmission project, proposed routes

         15   crossed or in the proximity of some existing

         16   infrastructure such as roads, railways, airports,

         17   float plane base -- special requirements or

         18   mitigative measures currently are not anticipated

         19   to be needed and no effects are expected on the

         20   local community infrastructure and services.

         21               Moving beyond infrastructure and

         22   services to the final component of the

         23   socioeconomic environment, personal family

         24   community life, one of its elements is

         25   transportation and safety, and we are throwing in




                                                                      260



          1   esthetics here, in each one of these the effects

          2   will not be significant.

          3               In terms of the generation project,

          4   yes, there will be some additional traffic during

          5   the construction period in certain areas, but this

          6   is not seen to cause any significant basis for

          7   concern.  Measures to warn newcomers who were at

          8   the site working, or travelling there, about the

          9   existing travelling hazards on Wuskwatim Lake and

         10   along the Burntwood River system will be part of

         11   the program.  Physical changes themselves brought

         12   about by the generation development on the

         13   esthetics of the area will be limited to the land

         14   of the project site, the borrow areas along access

         15   road, areas which are at the moment not generally

         16   accessible or being viewed by people.

         17               In terms of the transmission route

         18   project, route selection where feasible avoids

         19   residences and cabins.  In one instance a cabin is

         20   approximately 120 metres away, but will be

         21   screened from the transmission right-of-way by

         22   buffers of trees.  The community of Umperville is

         23   located east of the proposed route, but there is a

         24   vegetative buffer that separates it and the

         25   right-of-way.  Impacts in general are expected to




                                                                      261



          1   be, in terms of access, safety and esthetics,

          2   minor, and what they call incremental in nature,

          3   meaning that in many cases they will be inside

          4   existing right-of-ways in the area, for example,

          5   around Umperville.

          6               Generation effects on NCN health and

          7   social well-being, another element of personal,

          8   family and community life, will be managed.  There

          9   is no direct effect on health due to the water

         10   quality changes that Stuart described earlier at

         11   Wuskwatim Lake.  People camping and living there

         12   and using the water will not see significant

         13   quality changes in the water.

         14               Mercury levels in the pike and walleye

         15   in the lake may be temporarily increased.  The

         16   levels would remain lower, though, than those

         17   found today at Threepoint and Footprint Lakes, and

         18   mitigative measures as noted, and monitoring will

         19   take place of mercury in the fish.

         20               During construction, indirect effects

         21   both positive and negative will occur on community

         22   health at Nelson House and social well-being at

         23   Nelson House, and these will need to be managed.

         24               Income, employment and training are

         25   wonderful things, but they are changes for people




                                                                      262



          1   and they could produce issues in terms of their

          2   ability to deal with these changes.  The people of

          3   Nelson House are examining that, they are well

          4   aware of it and they are looking at ways to manage

          5   the positive and the negative, so that the outcome

          6   is good for everyone.

          7               Returning population, I noted is a

          8   potential issue that has to be managed and

          9   monitored by the community.  Concern about

         10   environmental changes is another dimension that

         11   comes from the history of the CRD.  No matter what

         12   we say, no matter what we do, people who lived

         13   through the CRD in Aboriginal communities have a

         14   high degree of stress and anxiety, particularly if

         15   they are elders, that new changes will not be

         16   whatever we say they will be, they will be a lot

         17   worse.  That NCN, in order to deal with the issue

         18   with its community, has to manage and deal with

         19   and discuss.

         20               In the long term, potential new

         21   revenues from this NCN investment, if it is

         22   developed and if they make the investment, could

         23   help address community priorities in the longer

         24   term and contribute to improvements on an ongoing

         25   basis in health and social well-being of their




                                                                      263



          1   community.

          2               Looking beyond the generation, looking

          3   at the transmission projects, it will not result

          4   in adverse effects on health.  Design and

          5   operating standards will avoid risks to health and

          6   safety.  No adverse health effects are anticipated

          7   from exposure to electric and magnetic fields

          8   associated with the transmission facilities.  The

          9   general consensus of world-wide scientific

         10   community, as far as we report on it, is that a

         11   public health risk from exposure to electric and

         12   magnetic fields, or EMF as they are often referred

         13   to, is not established.  And this position is

         14   supported by Federal and Provincial health

         15   agencies, and by the Manitoba Clean Environment

         16   Commission sponsored EMF experts workshop and

         17   position statement in 2001.  Manitoba Hydro

         18   continues to monitor studies on this subject,

         19   though, and measurement of EMF in individual homes

         20   will be made available on request for people that

         21   have specific concerns.

         22               Generation projects effects on NCN

         23   culture will also be managed by the community.

         24   NCN has identified the need for ceremonies to be

         25   undertaken before changes are made to Taskinigup




                                                                      264



          1   and Wuskatim Falls and the area.  Although the

          2   esthetics may not be a big deal because nobody is

          3   there at the moment, these are very important

          4   cultural areas for the community, and the treating

          5   of them with respect and the ceremonies involved

          6   with them in dealing with it, and dealing with the

          7   other sacred areas and cultural areas in this

          8   traditional Wuskatim Lake area of NCN, is critical

          9   to dealing with this in a respectful way.  NCN

         10   members in the future, if this is developed, could

         11   more easily visit the important sites in this area

         12   which they have been shut away from so long.

         13               Monitoring and contingency plans to

         14   protect Wuskatim Lake cultural sites are critical

         15   elements, including, as Councillor Thomas and

         16   others have noted, it doesn't matter that Manitoba

         17   Hydro and the expert team say we don't think there

         18   will be any problems of water invading the

         19   cultural sites in this area, the elders and other

         20   people want to make sure that they will be

         21   monitored anyway, and people talk about ways to

         22   deal with it in case the experts are wrong.

         23               NCN will establish a culture and

         24   heritage committee as a community to deal with

         25   these issues and to deal with all of the cultural




                                                                      265



          1   ongoing management issues associated with this

          2   project.

          3               Generation effects on the heritage

          4   resource, which is the final component in the EIS

          5   guidelines, will not be significant and will be

          6   monitored.  The heritage resource surveys

          7   conducted in areas for the construction camp, the

          8   site of the generating station, the access road

          9   and the borrow areas for the generation project

         10   showed no specific archeological sites being found

         11   at the present time.  A way marker, which is a

         12   marker showing the way, was found and has been

         13   relocated.  But when these areas are developed,

         14   using good, best practice, there will be an

         15   archaeologist on site to check as the process

         16   unfolds during the construction process for any

         17   artifacts or any other heritage resources as they

         18   are defined under the Act.

         19               NCN elders and members were consulted

         20   to ensure that cultural and other sites were

         21   identified and protected, both in the planning and

         22   in the programs for implementation and

         23   construction, and indeed in the long run through

         24   the operation of the area.

         25               To complete this, on the transmission




                                                                      266



          1   side, the effects on heritage resources will be

          2   minimized and are being minimized through routing,

          3   and they will be monitored through the

          4   development.  The routing process avoided known

          5   important cultural heritage sites, as Dave Hicks

          6   has already set out, and they are very important

          7   in various places, including the NCN area around

          8   Wuskwatim Lake.

          9               Construction phases of the project

         10   have the potential though to affect unknown

         11   heritage resources.  So before construction,

         12   surveys along the rights-of-way will be done to

         13   identify unknown heritage resources, and newly

         14   identified sites will be flagged and/or removed

         15   before construction begins.  The Manitoba Heritage

         16   Resources Branch and First Nations in the area,

         17   and Aboriginal communities in the area will be

         18   advised as appropriate of anything that is found

         19   and how it is being dealt with.

         20               That concludes our review of the

         21   components by each one of the environments -- and

         22   I will ask George Rempel, as the overall

         23   coordinator for our team that has been working on

         24   this, to just summarize three slides of the

         25   overall effects that were put in the integrated




                                                                      267



          1   summary, and then there will be some concluding

          2   comments I think from Mr. Wojczynski and

          3   Councillor Thomas.

          4               MR. REMPEL:  Thank you, Cam.

          5               As Cam indicated, we have three

          6   slides, one each on the generation and

          7   transmission projects and then a summary slide.

          8               Basically the summary of effects for

          9   the generation project builds on the fact that it

         10   was designed to be a low impact project.  This low

         11   head design that we have talked about reduces the

         12   amount of flooding, a very key characteristic of

         13   this project.  The modified run-of-the-river

         14   operation balances inflows and outflows.  This is

         15   not a fill and draw reservoir.  The reservoir will

         16   be kept very stable.  As a result, water level

         17   fluctuations on Wuskwatim Lake will be reduced,

         18   and the extent of water level fluctuations

         19   downstream will be limited.

         20               The environmental and cultural

         21   considerations have been incorporated into the

         22   route selection and the management of access on

         23   the road to the site.

         24               There will be environmental protection

         25   plans, that is a requirement of the guidelines.




                                                                      268



          1   They will be developed before the construction

          2   starts.  In fact, work has already begun on that.

          3   They will meet regulatory requirements and any

          4   conditions that are imposed in the event the

          5   project is approved, and they will incorporate

          6   proven environmental practices, and the

          7   contractors will be obligated to conform to these

          8   environmental protection plans.

          9               With regard to the Wuskatim

         10   transmission project, again, it has been designed

         11   to minimize effects, and that has been primarily

         12   done through careful selection of proposed routes.

         13   And Manitoba Hydro has extensive experience with

         14   design and construction standards and practices

         15   which will reduce environmental effects.  Manitoba

         16   Hydro has standard environmental protection

         17   practices.  It incorporates local and traditional

         18   knowledge in the construction and operation of the

         19   lines, but particularly in the construction.

         20   Again, environmental protection plans will be

         21   developed before construction starts, and this

         22   will outline site specific mitigation measures

         23   which will be provided to the contractors, and

         24   again, they will be obligated to adhere to these

         25   measures.




                                                                      269



          1               So, in summary, the projects have been

          2   designed to avoid and minimize adverse effects.

          3   Our conclusion, as environmental practitioners, is

          4   that they are not going to create significant

          5   adverse effects on the environment or related

          6   effects on people.  We have identified some

          7   adverse effects such as erosion and land use

          8   changes.  They are unavoidable.  It is our

          9   judgment that these are not significant.

         10               We do believe there will be positive

         11   bio-physical effects by displacing global

         12   greenhouse gas emissions from other sources and by

         13   the reduction of fluctuations that presently occur

         14   on Wuskwatim Lake.

         15               We also believe that there will be

         16   positive socioeconomic effects during construction

         17   and operation for people in the local region of

         18   the projects, as well as throughout the project --

         19   throughout the province I should say.

         20               That concludes our presentation on the

         21   Environmental Impact Assessment.  We appreciate

         22   your patience.  At this point, I believe

         23   Mr. Wojczynski and Councillor Thomas are going to

         24   wrap up the presentations.

         25               MR. WOJCZYNSKI:  Mr. Chair, Councillor




                                                                      270



          1   Thomas and I talked, we thought we could get done

          2   in less than 10 minutes.  If you prefer, we can

          3   hold and wait until the morning, but we could try

          4   to keep it as brief as possible.  We are at your

          5   disposal.

          6               MR. LECUYER:  I hear you saying 10

          7   minutes, and I think that is best that we conclude

          8   the presentation at this time, with the additional

          9   remarks that you are referring to.  I think we

         10   have sat here through until now, we can continue

         11   for -- another 10, 15 minutes won't change that.

         12               MR. WOJCZYNSKI:  I will start off, and

         13   then Councillor Thomas will provide the final

         14   remarks.

         15               You have heard much today about the

         16   need for alternatives and the EIS.  I would like

         17   to now briefly summarize both of these in the

         18   context of Manitoba Hydro's commitment to

         19   sustainable development principles that Mr. Adams

         20   referred to this morning in his opening remarks.

         21   I will do so very briefly and I will keep it short

         22   by listing the 7 principles of sustainable

         23   development and how the project embodies these.

         24               So, starting off with the integration

         25   of environmental and economic decisions, it is one




                                                                      271



          1   of the principles, sustainable development

          2   principles in Wuskwatim, the environmental and

          3   economic factors have been integrated quite

          4   clearly in the kind of discussion we had today,

          5   resulting in a profitable project that minimizes

          6   negative local environmental impacts, creates

          7   positive global environmental impacts, and

          8   produces overall positive social benefits.

          9               A second principle is shared

         10   responsibility and understanding.  Through

         11   NCN/Hydro partnership and through consultation

         12   with other people and communities, there is shared

         13   responsibility and understanding.

         14               Global responsibility, another

         15   principle -- clearly, and we have been emphasising

         16   throughout the day, Wuskwatim will contribute to

         17   global efforts to reduce greenhouse gases and

         18   other emissions as well.

         19               Other principles as well,

         20   conservation -- Wuskwatim will make sustainable

         21   use of renewable resources with no anticipated

         22   significant adverse environmental effects.

         23               Prevention -- major adverse effects

         24   are avoided, others are mitigated.

         25               Rehabilitation -- construction sites




                                                                      272



          1   will be rehabilitated.

          2               Stewardship -- current and future

          3   generations both will benefit.  Perhaps I should,

          4   at that point, expand slightly and I will be

          5   quick.

          6               The current generations will benefit

          7   from training, employment, and business

          8   opportunities as we talked about earlier.  Future

          9   generations will benefit from the project

         10   benefits, overall the project profits, and the

         11   enduring benefits to all Manitoba Hydro ratepayers

         12   and to NCN.

         13               As well, though, there will be a

         14   reliable and clean source of power for domestic

         15   customers in the long term and the very long term.

         16               Overall, the planning and development

         17   of Wuskwatim embodies the principles of

         18   sustainable development, and help convince us,

         19   help assist us in being confident that Wuskwatim

         20   will be Wuskwatim a very beneficial project.

         21               Thank you.  I will turn it over to

         22   Elvis.

         23               MR. THOMAS:  Thank you, Mr. Chairman,

         24   Commissioners.  We have now come to the end of our

         25   formal presentation today, and I would like just




                                                                      273



          1   to make a few brief concluding comments as well.

          2               We have focused on three main areas.

          3   We have described the whole project to everyone

          4   here.  And also we have focused on the need for

          5   and alternatives to, area of concern, and also the

          6   Environmental Impact Statement and the role that

          7   our people have played in the role of traditional

          8   knowledge in the whole process.

          9               Article 8 of the Churchill River

         10   Diversion implementation agreement that NCN

         11   ratified and signed in 1996, which is commonly

         12   referred to as the Northern Flood Agreement

         13   implementation agreement, signed by our people

         14   includes an article A process that requires that

         15   Manitoba Hydro consult with our First Nation prior

         16   to proceeding with any future hydroelectric

         17   development in our traditional territory, which is

         18   now referred to as our resource management area.

         19   They also have to obtain our consent and deal with

         20   compensation issues prior to the start of

         21   construction.

         22               Now, when Hydro first began

         23   considering the Wuskwatim project a number of

         24   years ago, the corporation complied with article 8

         25   and approached our First Nations to ask us, to see




                                                                      274



          1   if we wanted to look at the possibility of

          2   participating in developing the Wuskwatim project.

          3   The NCN Chief and Council decided, yes, this would

          4   be a good opportunity to explore.  And I, as a

          5   member of council, was given the future

          6   development portfolio to ensure that this issue

          7   can be looked at as well as can be.

          8               Along with that, a former negotiator

          9   for the implementation agreement, Marcel Moody,

         10   was leading negotiations at that time, and there

         11   was also a former Chief, Norman Linklater.  Both

         12   of those people I saw as being valuable to this

         13   process, so I engaged them as my co-managers, and

         14   they became a part of my team to oversee the

         15   future development portfolio.

         16               We hired our own legal, financial and

         17   engineering advisors.  On top of that, we also

         18   made sure that, if this is going to be a

         19   meaningful process, that we would engage in a

         20   community driven process.  By that, it used to be

         21   that outside experts, advisers, consultants, you

         22   name them, they all seem to be leading the

         23   situation with respect to trying to negotiate for

         24   the best interests of our people.  We found that

         25   it ended up being a long drawn out process where




                                                                      275



          1   all the benefits went to them as opposed to my

          2   people.  So we had enough of that.  The Chief and

          3   Council decided that we were going to take the

          4   bull by the horns and start negotiating for a

          5   deal.  It wasn't too long when we concluded the

          6   implementation of the 1996 agreement, and we

          7   started receiving benefits for our community, and

          8   we also negotiated strongly to have an article 8

          9   process included that would require Manitoba Hydro

         10   to come to us first before doing anything again

         11   within our traditional territory, efforts or

         12   activities that would severely impact upon our

         13   rights as First Nations people.

         14               We established a team.  We made sure

         15   that our people were hired to be the consultants.

         16   We hired also financial, legal, engineering

         17   advisors, and these people are all working for us.

         18   We direct them as opposed to them directing us.

         19   So there has been quite a significant change.  As

         20   a result, by doing things that way where our

         21   people are involved via open houses, newsletters,

         22   and other forms of communication, something that

         23   has not been done by any government that I have

         24   seen in Canada, whether it is the Manitoba

         25   Government or the Government of Canada, they have




                                                                      276



          1   not consulted with the people in the way that we

          2   have.  We have established a process that is truly

          3   historical in nature and different from the way

          4   business is done as usual.

          5               So, with that, we feel confident that

          6   we will -- we have been involved in this process

          7   that will produce a very positive impact for our

          8   people.

          9               If you will note from all the

         10   presentations that have been done, we have focused

         11   on three main areas, in addition to other things

         12   as well, of course.  One being employment and

         13   training.  We have tried to secure employment for

         14   our First Nations people, for NCN, because it is

         15   our area that is going to be developed and

         16   impacted.  But we have also taken into

         17   consideration that there are other people living

         18   in Manitoba and Canada, and we factor that into

         19   our thinking as well, and tried as best we can to

         20   spread out the opportunities and the benefits that

         21   would be materializing from this project.

         22               We have also tried to secure the

         23   contracts, the direct contracts where we could do

         24   some of the work that is going to be needed for

         25   the project.  And we have also come to a point




                                                                      277



          1   where we have also asked for some ownership.  Our

          2   people asked us, or directed us to go out and

          3   negotiate with Hydro to see if we can own a

          4   portion of the dam.  We initially started with 10

          5   percent, we ended up with 33 percent.  We think

          6   that is a very good achievement for us.  Hydro so

          7   graciously decided they were going to consider

          8   that as a good -- part of the deal that we are

          9   negotiating.

         10               We think it is a very wise decision,

         11   to ensure that we can partner in projects that

         12   occur on our traditional territory.  And I think

         13   that will help to set the stage for the any

         14   upcoming ing projects that are going to be

         15   considered.  We have done things in a way that is

         16   quite different.

         17               We have had two -- or we are going to

         18   have had two, by the time we finish, referendums

         19   on this issue.  The first one we got back in

         20   September of 2001.  We received 66 percent overall

         21   support.  In Nelson House per se or proper, we

         22   received 82 percent support from our community.

         23   Now, that is a very strong amount of support that

         24   we got from our people to pursue this deal.

         25               In addition, when we finalized the




                                                                      278



          1   project development agreement, most of which is

          2   previewed in the summary of understandings that

          3   has also been put forward to the Commission --

          4   excuse me, I think it was bad water in the first

          5   place -- the project development agreement itself

          6   will be taken to the people, again, and we will

          7   have another secret ballot vote in a referendum to

          8   either get approval or not get approval for this

          9   particular project.

         10               We want the Chairman and Commissioners

         11   to keep in mind that we have had a number of

         12   critics as well along the way.  In any democratic

         13   society, you will find you do not have 100 percent

         14   support from all the people that put you in

         15   positions of leadership.  You will have some

         16   people that think they have better ideas than you

         17   do, and they voice those kind of concerns.

         18               In addition, just as a final comment,

         19   we have had various environmental groups -- and I

         20   don't want to disparage or say anything negative

         21   towards the people who are expressing genuine

         22   interest about impacts on the environment -- but

         23   we have had one very significant environmental

         24   group come in while we were living our way of

         25   life, and they protested against us capitalizing




                                                                      279



          1   on the fur trade.  That totally decimated our way

          2   of life.  They did not have anything to offer in

          3   its place.  I hope that that doesn't happen this

          4   time around.  That you will hear their concerns,

          5   but at the same time, if they have nothing better

          6   to offer, I suggest that perhaps maybe our way of

          7   doing things might be a better option to pursue.

          8               With that, I thank you very much for

          9   taking the time to listen to me and also my

         10   people.  Thank you.

         11               MR. LECUYER:  Thank you very much.  I

         12   realize you have been sitting at the front and

         13   speaking to us all day, and we will reconvene

         14   tomorrow morning, and we will expect you will

         15   still be sitting and answering to us, or speaking

         16   to us again for some days to come -- not only to

         17   us, but to anyone present and participating who

         18   has questions, concerns to address.  So, we are

         19   early in the process.  We have gone along way in

         20   one short day.  I thank you for that.  We will

         21   reconvene tomorrow, Mr. Grewar, again at 9:00

         22   o'clock?

         23               MR. GREWAR:  That's correct,

         24   Mr. Chairman, 9:00 a.m.

         25   




                                                                      280



          1   

          2               (ADJOURNED AT 5:15 P.M.)

          3   

          4   

          5   

          6   

          7   

          8   

          9   

         10   

         11   

         12   

         13   

         14   

         15   

         16   

         17   

         18   

         19   

         20   

         21   

         22   

         23   

         24   

         25